WO2020143580A1 - Vector indication method for constructing precoding vector, and communication apparatus - Google Patents

Vector indication method for constructing precoding vector, and communication apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020143580A1
WO2020143580A1 PCT/CN2020/070495 CN2020070495W WO2020143580A1 WO 2020143580 A1 WO2020143580 A1 WO 2020143580A1 CN 2020070495 W CN2020070495 W CN 2020070495W WO 2020143580 A1 WO2020143580 A1 WO 2020143580A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
frequency domain
reported
vector
domain unit
vectors
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2020/070495
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
王潇涵
金黄平
毕晓艳
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2020143580A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020143580A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/0413MIMO systems
    • H04B7/0456Selection of precoding matrices or codebooks, e.g. using matrices antenna weighting
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/0413MIMO systems
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/06Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/06Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
    • H04B7/0613Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission
    • H04B7/0615Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of weighted versions of same signal
    • H04B7/0619Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of weighted versions of same signal using feedback from receiving side
    • H04B7/0621Feedback content
    • H04B7/0626Channel coefficients, e.g. channel state information [CSI]
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/06Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
    • H04B7/0613Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission
    • H04B7/0615Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of weighted versions of same signal
    • H04B7/0619Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of weighted versions of same signal using feedback from receiving side
    • H04B7/0636Feedback format
    • H04B7/0639Using selective indices, e.g. of a codebook, e.g. pre-distortion matrix index [PMI] or for beam selection

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communication, and more specifically, to a vector indication method and communication device for constructing a precoding vector.
  • massive multiple-input multiple-output (Massive MIMO) technology network equipment can reduce interference between multiple users and interference between multiple signal streams of the same user through precoding technology. Thereby improving signal quality, realizing space division multiplexing and improving spectrum utilization.
  • the terminal device may determine the precoding vector by way of channel measurement, for example, and hope that through feedback, the network device obtains a precoding vector that is the same as or similar to the precoding vector determined by the terminal device.
  • the terminal device may indicate the precoding vector to the network device through a feedback method combining space domain compression and frequency domain compression. Specifically, the terminal device may select one or more space domain vectors and one or more frequency domain vectors based on the precoding vectors of each frequency domain unit on each transmission layer, so that the matrix of the matrix constructed by the space domain vectors and frequency domain vectors The weighted sum is used to fit the precoding vector corresponding to each frequency domain unit on each transmission layer.
  • the present application provides a vector indication method and a communication device for constructing a precoding vector, in order to clarify the length of the frequency domain vector, and then determine the frequency domain vector for constructing the precoding vector.
  • a vector indication method for constructing a precoding vector is provided.
  • the method may be executed by a terminal device, or may be executed by a chip configured in the terminal device.
  • the method includes: generating first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate one or more frequency domain vectors, and the one or more frequency domain vectors are used to construct one or more frequency domain unit groups
  • the precoding vector corresponding to each frequency domain unit, the length of the frequency domain vector N f is from the frequency domain unit in the frequency domain unit from the first frequency domain unit to be reported to the last frequency domain unit
  • the number Q of domain units is determined, where the frequency domain unit group includes one or more frequency domain units, and the bandwidth occupied by the frequency domain unit group is part or all of the bandwidth occupied by the frequency domain of the reported bandwidth; N f and Q are all positive integers; send the first indication information.
  • the terminal device determines the length of the frequency domain vector based on the number of frequency domain units contained in the bandwidth occupied by the frequency domain unit from the first frequency domain unit to the last frequency domain unit in the frequency domain unit group , Can make the selected frequency domain vector can maintain the continuity of the frequency domain, and can more accurately reflect the changing law of the channel in the frequency domain. Therefore, it is beneficial to obtain higher feedback accuracy, so that the precoding vector recovered by the network device based on the feedback of the terminal device can be better adapted to the channel, which is further beneficial to improve the subsequent data transmission performance.
  • the selected frequency domain vector does not really simulate the changing law of channels on consecutive frequency domain units, so It cannot accurately reflect the changing law of the channel in the frequency domain, the feedback accuracy is affected, and the subsequent data transmission performance may also be affected.
  • the generating the first indication information includes: generating the first if the frequency domain unit to be reported in the frequency domain unit group meets a preset condition One instruction.
  • the terminal device may determine whether to use the method provided in the embodiment of the present application to feed back information for constructing the precoding vector according to the frequency domain unit to be reported. For example, when the frequency domain units to be reported are more continuously distributed in frequency domain resources, the method provided in the embodiment of the present application may be used to feed back the information used to construct the precoding vector; for example, when the frequency domain units to be reported When the number is large, the method provided in the embodiment of the present application may be used to feed back the information used to construct the precoding vector.
  • the method further includes: receiving second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate the number and location of frequency domain units to be reported.
  • the network device may indicate the number and location of frequency domain units to be reported to the terminal device through the second indication information, so that the terminal device determines whether to use the embodiment of the present application according to the number and/or location of frequency domain units to be reported
  • a method is provided to feed back the information used to construct the precoding vector, and the length of the frequency domain vector used for frequency domain compression can be further determined.
  • the second indication information may be, for example, the reporting bandwidth (csi-ReportingBand) in the channel state information (channel) state information (CSI) reporting configuration (CSI-ReportConfig).
  • the csi-ReportingBand indicates the number and position of subbands to be reported through a bitmap.
  • the number and position of the frequency domain unit to be reported may be determined based on the predetermined granularity relationship between the frequency domain unit and the subband . Therefore, the csi-ReportingBand can indirectly indicate the number and location of frequency domain units to be reported.
  • csi-ReportingBand is only an example of the second indication information, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. This application does not exclude other existing signaling or newly added signaling to indicate the number and location of frequency domain units to be reported.
  • a vector indication method for constructing a precoding vector is provided.
  • the method may be executed by a network device, or may be executed by a chip configured in the network device.
  • the method includes: receiving first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate one or more frequency domain vectors, and the one or more frequency domain vectors are used to construct one or more frequency domain unit groups
  • the precoding vector corresponding to each frequency domain unit, the length of the frequency domain vector N f is from the frequency domain unit in the frequency domain unit from the first frequency domain unit to be reported to the last frequency domain unit
  • the number Q of domain units is determined, where the frequency domain unit group includes one or more frequency domain units, and the bandwidth occupied by the frequency domain unit group is part or all of the bandwidth occupied by the frequency domain of the reported bandwidth; N f and Q are all positive integers; one or more frequency domain vectors are determined according to the first indication information.
  • the length of the frequency domain vector is determined based on the number of frequency domain units included in the bandwidth occupied by the frequency domain unit from the first frequency domain unit to the last frequency domain unit in the frequency domain unit group.
  • the selected frequency domain vector can maintain the continuity of the frequency domain, and can more accurately reflect the changing law of the channel in the frequency domain. Therefore, it is beneficial to obtain a higher feedback accuracy, so that the precoding vector recovered by the network device based on the feedback of the terminal device can be better adapted to the channel, which is further beneficial to improve the subsequent data transmission performance.
  • the selected frequency domain vector does not really simulate the changing law of channels on consecutive frequency domain units, so It cannot accurately reflect the changing law of the channel in the frequency domain, the feedback accuracy is affected, and the subsequent data transmission performance may also be affected.
  • the determining the one or more frequency domain vectors according to the first indication information includes: the frequency domain unit to be reported in the frequency domain unit group meets In the case of preset conditions, one or more frequency domain vectors are determined according to the first indication information.
  • the terminal device may determine whether to use the method provided in the embodiment of the present application to determine the length of the frequency domain vector according to the frequency domain unit to be reported, and feed back the precoding vector based on the dual domain compression method.
  • the method provided in the embodiment of the present application may be used to determine the length of the frequency domain vector, and the precoding vector is fed back based on the method of dual domain compression; and
  • the method provided in the embodiment of the present application may be used to determine the length of the frequency domain vector, and the precoding vector is fed back based on the dual domain compression method.
  • the method further includes: sending second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate the number and location of frequency domain units to be reported.
  • the network device may indicate the number and location of frequency domain units to be reported to the terminal device through the second indication information, so that the terminal device determines whether to use the embodiment of the present application according to the number and/or location of frequency domain units to be reported
  • the provided method determines the length of the frequency domain vector, and feeds back the precoding vector based on the dual-domain compression method, and can further determine the length of the frequency domain vector for frequency domain compression.
  • the second indication information may be, for example, the reporting bandwidth (csi-ReportingBand) in the channel state information (channel) state information (CSI) reporting configuration (CSI-ReportConfig).
  • the csi-ReportingBand indicates the number and position of subbands to be reported through a bitmap.
  • the number and position of the frequency domain unit to be reported may be determined based on the predetermined granularity relationship between the frequency domain unit and the subband . Therefore, the csi-ReportingBand can indirectly indicate the number and location of frequency domain units to be reported.
  • csi-ReportingBand is only an example of the second indication information, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. This application does not exclude other existing signaling or newly added signaling to indicate the number and location of frequency domain units to be reported.
  • the preset condition includes: the number of frequency domain units to be reported in the frequency domain unit group is greater than or equal to x ⁇ Q, where x is a predefined value , 0 ⁇ x ⁇ 1.
  • the method provided in the embodiment of the present application may be used to determine the length of the frequency domain vector and based on dual domain compression Method to feed back precoding vectors.
  • x is 0.5.
  • x of 0.5 is only one possible value of x provided in this application, and should not constitute any limitation to this application.
  • N f Q.
  • a set of frequency domain vectors of different lengths can be predefined in the frequency domain vector set.
  • the terminal device determines the Q value, it can directly select a frequency domain vector with a length equal to the Q value from the set of frequency domain vectors.
  • the length of the frequency domain vector determined based on this method makes the selected frequency domain vector maintain the continuity of the frequency domain, which is beneficial to obtain higher feedback accuracy.
  • N f Q.
  • the terminal device determines the Q value, it can select a frequency domain vector with a length greater than the Q value from the set of frequency domain vectors.
  • the length of the frequency domain vector determined based on this method enables the selected frequency domain vector to maintain the continuity of the frequency domain, which is beneficial to obtain higher feedback accuracy.
  • a method for reporting a precoding matrix indicator (precoding matrix indicator (PMI)) is provided.
  • the method may be executed by a terminal device, or may be executed by a chip configured in the terminal device.
  • the method includes: generating a PMI; where the frequency domain unit to be reported in the frequency domain unit group satisfies a preset condition, the PMI includes an indication of one or more frequency domain vectors, and the one or more The frequency domain vector is a part of the frequency domain vector in the frequency domain vector group.
  • the frequency domain vector group includes a plurality of frequency domain vectors, and the plurality of frequency domain vectors are mutually orthogonal to each other; in the frequency domain unit group When the reported frequency domain unit does not satisfy the preset condition, the PMI does not include an indication of the frequency domain vector; wherein, the frequency domain unit group includes one or more frequency domain units, and the frequency domain unit group occupies The bandwidth is the frequency domain where the reported bandwidth occupies part or all of the bandwidth; the PMI is sent.
  • a method for reporting PMI is provided.
  • the method may be performed by a network device or may be performed by a chip configured in the network device.
  • the method includes: receiving a PMI; where the frequency domain unit to be reported in the frequency domain unit group satisfies a preset condition, the PMI includes an indication of one or more frequency domain vectors, and the one or more The frequency domain vector is a part of the frequency domain vector in the frequency domain vector group.
  • the frequency domain vector group includes a plurality of frequency domain vectors and the two frequency domain vectors are mutually orthogonal to each other; to be reported in the frequency domain unit group If the frequency domain unit does not satisfy the preset condition, the PMI does not include an indication of the frequency domain vector; wherein, the frequency domain unit group includes one or more frequency domain units, and the bandwidth occupied by the frequency domain unit group To occupy part or all of the bandwidth in the frequency domain for reporting bandwidth; according to the PMI and whether the frequency domain unit to be reported in the frequency domain unit group satisfies the preset condition, determine the precoding matrix corresponding to each frequency domain unit.
  • a method of selecting a part of frequency domain vectors from the frequency domain vector group and reporting to construct a precoding vector is called a first compression method; the entire frequency domain vector group is used to construct a precoding method.
  • the method of encoding vectors is called a second compression method based on frequency domain transformation.
  • the terminal device may determine a reasonable feedback method according to the number and/or location of frequency domain units to be reported.
  • feedback methods including the feedback method of type II (type II) codebook and the feedback method based on dual-domain compression (including the above-mentioned first compression method and second compression method)
  • the feedback overhead and feedback accuracy are comprehensively considered to Achieve the effect of higher feedback accuracy at the same cost.
  • the preset condition includes: the number of frequency domain units to be reported in the frequency domain unit group is greater than or equal to x ⁇ Q, where x is a predefined value, 0 ⁇ x ⁇ 1, Q represents the number of frequency domain units to be reported in the bandwidth occupied by the frequency domain unit from the first frequency domain unit to the last frequency domain unit to be reported in this frequency domain unit group, Q is positive Integer.
  • a part of the frequency domain vectors can be selected from the frequency domain vector group as the frequency domain for constructing the precoding vector vector.
  • the preset condition includes: the number of frequency domain units to be reported in the frequency domain unit group is greater than or equal to a preset threshold.
  • all frequency domain vectors in the frequency domain vector group may be used as frequency domain vectors for constructing a precoding vector.
  • the length N f of the frequency domain vector is selected from the first in the frequency domain unit group
  • the number Q of frequency domain units to be reported from the frequency domain unit to be reported to the last frequency domain unit to be reported in the bandwidth occupied by the frequency domain unit to be reported is determined, and N f and Q are both positive integers.
  • the length of the frequency domain vector is determined based on the number of frequency domain units included in the bandwidth from the first frequency domain unit to be reported to the last frequency domain unit in the frequency domain unit group, so that the selected frequency domain vector can be made It can maintain the continuity of the frequency domain, and can more accurately reflect the changing law of the channel in the frequency domain. Therefore, it is beneficial to obtain a higher feedback accuracy, so that the precoding vector recovered by the network device based on the feedback of the terminal device can be better adapted to the channel, which is further beneficial to improve the subsequent data transmission performance.
  • the frequency domain unit to be reported in the frequency domain unit group does not satisfy the preset condition, if the PMI includes an indication of the frequency domain vector group, the The length N 4 of the frequency domain vector in the frequency domain vector group is determined by the number of frequency domain units to be reported in the frequency domain unit group, and N 4 is a positive integer.
  • the number of subbands it may be considered to use the entire frequency domain vector group to construct a precoding vector.
  • the length of the frequency domain vector is determined according to the number of frequency domain units to be reported, that is, the same number of frequency domain vectors as the number of frequency domain vectors are selected to construct the precoding vector.
  • the frequency domain vector used to construct the precoding vector can be reduced, so that the number of weighting coefficient reports can be reduced, which is beneficial to reduce feedback overhead.
  • a communication device including various modules or units for performing the method in the first aspect or the third aspect and any possible implementation manner of the first aspect or the third aspect.
  • a communication device including a processor.
  • the processor is coupled to the memory and can be used to execute instructions in the memory to implement the first aspect or the third aspect and the method in any possible implementation manner of the first aspect or the third aspect.
  • the communication device further includes a memory.
  • the communication device further includes a communication interface, and the processor is coupled to the communication interface.
  • the communication device is a terminal device.
  • the communication interface may be a transceiver or an input/output interface.
  • the communication device is a chip configured in the terminal device.
  • the communication interface may be an input/output interface.
  • the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit.
  • the input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.
  • a communication device including various modules or units for performing the method in any one of the second aspect or the fourth aspect and any possible implementation manner of the second aspect or the fourth aspect.
  • a communication device including a processor.
  • the processor is coupled to the memory, and can be used to execute instructions in the memory to implement the second aspect or the fourth aspect and the method in any possible implementation manner of the second aspect or the fourth aspect.
  • the communication device further includes a memory.
  • the communication device further includes a communication interface, and the processor is coupled to the communication interface.
  • the communication device is a network device.
  • the communication interface may be a transceiver or an input/output interface.
  • the communication device is a chip configured in a network device.
  • the communication interface may be an input/output interface.
  • the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit.
  • the input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.
  • a processor including: an input circuit, an output circuit, and a processing circuit.
  • the processing circuit is configured to receive a signal through the input circuit and transmit a signal through the output circuit, so that the processor executes any of the first aspect to the fourth aspect and any possible implementation manner of the first aspect to the fourth aspect The method.
  • the processor may be a chip
  • the input circuit may be an input pin
  • the output circuit may be an output pin
  • the processing circuit may be a transistor, a gate circuit, a flip-flop, and various logic circuits.
  • the input signal received by the input circuit may be received and input by, for example, but not limited to a receiver
  • the signal output by the output circuit may be, for example but not limited to, output to and transmitted by the transmitter
  • the circuit may be the same circuit, which is used as an input circuit and an output circuit at different times, respectively.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific implementation manner of the processor and various circuits.
  • a processing device including a processor and a memory.
  • the processor is used to read instructions stored in the memory, and can receive signals through the receiver and transmit signals through the transmitter to perform any of the first aspect to the fourth aspect and any possible implementation manner of the first aspect to the fourth aspect Methods.
  • processors there are one or more processors and one or more memories.
  • the memory may be integrated with the processor, or the memory and the processor are provided separately.
  • the memory may be non-transitory (non-transitory) memory, such as read-only memory (read only memory (ROM), which may be integrated with the processor on the same chip, or may be set in different On the chip, the embodiments of the present application do not limit the type of memory and the manner of setting the memory and the processor.
  • ROM read only memory
  • sending instruction information may be a process of outputting instruction information from the processor
  • receiving capability information may be a process of receiving input capability information by the processor.
  • the data output by the processor may be output to the transmitter, and the input data received by the processor may come from the receiver.
  • the transmitter and the receiver may be collectively referred to as a transceiver.
  • the processing device in the above tenth aspect may be one or more chips, and the processor may be implemented by hardware or software.
  • the processor When implemented by hardware, the processor may be a logic circuit, an integrated circuit, etc.;
  • the processor When implemented by software, the processor may be a general-purpose processor, implemented by reading software codes stored in a memory, the memory may be integrated in the processor, may be located outside the processor, and exists independently.
  • a computer program product includes: a computer program (also referred to as code or instructions) that, when the computer program is executed, causes a computer to perform the first aspect to The fourth aspect and the method in any possible implementation manner of the first aspect to the fourth aspect.
  • a computer program also referred to as code or instructions
  • a computer-readable medium that stores a computer program (also may be referred to as code or instructions) that when executed on a computer, causes the computer to perform the above-mentioned first aspect to The fourth aspect and the method in any possible implementation manner of the first aspect to the fourth aspect.
  • a computer program also may be referred to as code or instructions
  • a communication system including the aforementioned network device and terminal device.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system applicable to a vector indicating method for constructing a precoding vector according to an embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic flowchart of a vector indicating method for constructing a precoding vector provided by an embodiment of the present application
  • 3 and 4 are schematic diagrams of frequency domain unit groups and reporting bandwidth provided by embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of a bitmap, a reporting bandwidth, and a frequency domain unit group provided by an embodiment of this application;
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic flowchart of a method for reporting PMI according to another embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • GSM global mobile communication
  • CDMA code division multiple access
  • WCDMA broadband code division multiple access
  • general packet radio service general packet radio service, GPRS
  • LTE long term evolution
  • LTE frequency division duplex FDD
  • TDD time division duplex
  • UMTS universal mobile communication system
  • WiMAX worldwide interoperability for microwave access
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system 100 suitable for a vector indication method for constructing a precoding vector according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication system 100 may include at least one network device, such as the network device 110 shown in FIG. 1; the communication system 100 may also include at least one terminal device, such as the terminal device 120 shown in FIG. 1.
  • the network device 110 and the terminal device 120 can communicate through a wireless link.
  • Each communication device, such as the network device 110 or the terminal device 120 may be configured with multiple antennas.
  • the configured multiple antennas may include at least one transmit antenna for transmitting signals and at least one receive antenna for receiving signals. Therefore, the communication devices in the communication system 100, such as the network device 110 and the terminal device 120, can communicate through multi-antenna technology.
  • the network device in the communication system may be any device with wireless transceiver function.
  • the network equipment includes but is not limited to: evolved Node B (evolved Node B, eNB), radio network controller (radio network controller, RNC), node B (Node B, NB), base station controller (base station controller, BSC) ), base transceiver station (BTS), home base station (for example, home evolved NodeB, or home Node B, HNB), baseband unit (BBU), wireless fidelity (WiFi) system Access point (access point, AP), wireless relay node, wireless backhaul node, transmission point (transmission point, TP) or sending and receiving point (transmission and reception point, TRP), etc.
  • 5G such as, NR, gNB in the system, or transmission point (TRP or TP), one or a group (including multiple antenna panels) of the base station in the 5G system, or it can also be a network node that constitutes a gNB or transmission point
  • gNB may include a centralized unit (CU) and DU.
  • the gNB may also include a radio unit (RU).
  • the CU implements some functions of gNB, and the DU implements some functions of gNB.
  • CU implements radio resource control (RRC), packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layer functions
  • DU implements radio link control (RLC), media access control (media access control, MAC) and physical (PHY) layer functions. Since the information of the RRC layer will eventually become the information of the PHY layer or be transformed from the information of the PHY layer, under this architecture, high-level signaling, such as RRC layer signaling, can also be considered to be sent by the DU , Or, sent by DU+CU.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • PDCP packet data convergence protocol
  • RLC radio link control
  • MAC media access control
  • PHY physical
  • the network device may be a CU node, or a DU node, or a device including a CU node and a DU node.
  • the CU may be divided into network devices in a radio access network (RAN), and may also be divided into network devices in a core network (CN), which is not limited in this application.
  • RAN radio access network
  • CN core network
  • terminal equipment in the wireless communication system may also be referred to as user equipment (UE), access terminal, subscriber unit, user station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, User terminal, terminal, wireless communication device, user agent or user device.
  • UE user equipment
  • the terminal device in the embodiment of the present application may be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a computer with wireless transceiver function, a virtual reality (virtual reality, VR) terminal device, and an augmented reality (augmented reality, AR) terminal Wireless terminals in equipment, industrial control (industrial control), wireless terminals in self-driving (self-driving), wireless terminals in remote medical (remote medical), wireless terminals in smart grid (smart grid), transportation safety ( Wireless terminals in transportation, safety terminals in smart cities, wireless terminals in smart homes, etc.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit application scenarios.
  • FIG. 1 is only a simplified schematic diagram for ease of understanding and examples.
  • the communication system 100 may also include other network devices or other terminal devices, which are not shown in FIG. 1.
  • the processing procedure of the downlink signal at the physical layer before sending may be performed by the network device, or may also be performed by a chip configured in the network device. For convenience of explanation, they are collectively referred to as network devices hereinafter.
  • the network device can process the code word on the physical channel.
  • the codeword may be coded bits that have been coded (eg, including channel coding).
  • the codeword is scrambled to generate scrambling bits.
  • the scrambled bits undergo modulation mapping to obtain modulation symbols.
  • the modulation symbols are mapped to multiple layers (layers) through layer mapping, or transmission layers.
  • the modulation symbols after layer mapping are subjected to precoding to obtain a precoded signal.
  • the pre-encoded signal is mapped to multiple REs after being mapped to resource elements (RE). These REs are then orthogonally multiplexed (orthogonal frequency division multiplexing, OFDM) modulated and transmitted through the antenna port.
  • OFDM orthogonally multiplexed
  • the sending device (such as a network device) can process the signal to be transmitted with the help of a precoding matrix that matches the channel resource when the channel state is known, so that the precoded signal to be transmitted and the channel It is adapted to reduce the complexity of receiving devices (such as terminal devices) to eliminate the influence between channels. Therefore, through the precoding process of the signal to be transmitted, the received signal quality (for example, signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR), etc.) can be improved. Therefore, by using precoding technology, transmission devices and multiple receiving devices can be transmitted on the same time-frequency resources, that is, multiple users, multiple inputs, and multiple outputs (MU-MIMO).
  • SINR signal to interference plus noise ratio
  • the sending device may also perform precoding in other ways. For example, when channel information (such as, but not limited to, channel matrix) cannot be obtained, pre-coding is performed using a pre-coding matrix or a weighting processing method set in advance. For brevity, the specific content of this article will not be repeated here.
  • channel information such as, but not limited to, channel matrix
  • PMI Precoding matrix and precoding matrix indicator
  • the precoding matrix may be, for example, a precoding matrix corresponding to each frequency domain unit determined by the terminal device based on the channel matrix of each frequency domain unit (eg, subband).
  • the channel matrix may be determined by the terminal device through channel estimation or other methods or based on channel reciprocity.
  • the specific method for the terminal device to determine the channel matrix is not limited to the above, and the specific implementation manner may refer to the existing technology.
  • the precoding matrix can be obtained by singular value decomposition (SVD) of the channel matrix or the covariance matrix of the channel matrix, or by eigenvalue decomposition (eigenvalue decomposition) of the covariance matrix of the channel matrix. EVD).
  • SVD singular value decomposition
  • eigenvalue decomposition eigenvalue decomposition
  • the precoding matrix corresponding to the frequency domain unit may refer to the precoding matrix fed back for the frequency domain unit, for example, it may be performed based on the reference signal on the frequency domain unit Precoding matrix for channel measurement and feedback.
  • the precoding matrix corresponding to the frequency domain unit may be used as a precoding matrix for precoding subsequent data transmitted through the frequency domain unit.
  • the precoding matrix corresponding to the frequency domain unit may also be simply referred to as the precoding matrix of the frequency domain unit
  • the precoding vector corresponding to the frequency domain unit may also be referred to as the precoding vector of the frequency domain unit.
  • the precoding matrix determined by the network device based on the feedback of the terminal device may be directly used for downlink data transmission; it may also go through some beamforming methods, for example, including zero forcing (zero forcing, ZF), regularized zero-forcing (RZF), minimum mean square error (MMSE), signal-to-leakage-and-noise (SLNR), etc.
  • ZF zero forcing
  • RZF regularized zero-forcing
  • MMSE minimum mean square error
  • SLNR signal-to-leakage-and-noise
  • the precoding matrix (or vector) referred to below may refer to the precoding matrix (or vector) determined by the network device based on feedback from the terminal device.
  • a precoding matrix may include one or more vectors, such as column vectors. A precoding matrix can be used to determine one or more precoding vectors.
  • the precoding vector may be a precoding matrix.
  • the precoding vector may refer to the component of the precoding matrix on one transmission layer.
  • the precoding vector may refer to the component of the precoding matrix in one polarization direction.
  • the precoding vector may refer to the components of the precoding matrix in one transmission layer and one polarization direction.
  • the precoding vector may also be determined by the vector in the precoding matrix, for example, obtained by performing mathematical transformation on the vector in the precoding matrix. This application does not limit the mathematical transformation relationship between the precoding matrix and the precoding vector.
  • Antenna port short for port. It can be understood as a virtual antenna recognized by the receiving device. Or a transmit antenna that can be distinguished in space. One antenna port can be configured for each virtual antenna, each virtual antenna can be a weighted combination of multiple physical antennas, and each antenna port can correspond to one reference signal, therefore, each antenna port can be called a reference signal port . In the embodiment of the present application, the antenna port may refer to an actual independent transmitting unit (TxRU).
  • TxRU actual independent transmitting unit
  • Dual domain compression Including air domain compression and frequency domain compression.
  • Spatial domain compression may refer to selecting one or more spatial domain vectors in the spatial domain vector set as the spatial domain vectors for constructing the precoding vector.
  • Frequency domain compression may refer to selecting one or more frequency domain vectors from a set of frequency domain vectors as frequency domain vectors for constructing a precoding vector.
  • the selected airspace vector is part or all of the airspace vectors in the set of airspace vectors.
  • the selected frequency domain vector is part or all of the frequency domain vectors in the frequency domain vector set.
  • the matrix determined by one space domain vector and one frequency domain vector may be, for example, a space frequency component matrix.
  • the selected one or more space domain vectors and one or more frequency domain vectors can be used to determine one or more space frequency component matrices.
  • the weighted sum of the one or more space-frequency component matrices can be used to construct a space-frequency matrix corresponding to one transmission layer.
  • the space-frequency matrix can be approximated as the weighted sum of the space-frequency component matrix determined by the selected one or more space-domain vectors and one or more frequency-domain vectors.
  • the space domain vector and the frequency domain vector used to construct a space frequency component matrix may be called a space frequency vector pair.
  • the network device After the network device obtains the space domain vector, frequency domain vector, and weighting coefficients that can be used to construct the space frequency matrix, it can further determine the precoding vector corresponding to each frequency domain unit based on the constructed space frequency matrix.
  • the terminal device may feed back indications of L space domain vectors, indications of M frequency domain vectors, and indications of K weighting coefficients to the network device.
  • K ⁇ L ⁇ M.
  • L space domain vectors and M frequency domain vectors can be used to construct L ⁇ M space frequency vector pairs.
  • Each space-frequency vector pair in the L ⁇ M space-frequency vector pairs may include one space-domain vector in L space-domain vectors and one frequency-domain vector in M frequency-domain vectors.
  • a space frequency vector pair is uniquely determined by a space domain vector and a frequency domain vector.
  • the terminal device may feedback the weighting coefficient based on some or all of the L ⁇ M space-frequency vector pairs. Therefore, the number K of weighting coefficients fed back by the terminal device may be less than or equal to the number L ⁇ M of space-frequency vector pairs.
  • the dual-domain compression is separately compressed in the air domain and the frequency domain.
  • the terminal device feeds back, it can feed the selected one or more space domain vectors and one or more frequency domain vectors to the network device, instead of separately feeding back the subbands based on each frequency domain unit (such as subband). Weighting factors (including amplitude and phase). Therefore, the feedback overhead can be greatly reduced.
  • the frequency domain vector can represent the change law of the channel in frequency
  • the linear change of the channel in the frequency domain can be simulated by linear superposition of one or more frequency domain vectors. Therefore, high feedback accuracy can still be maintained, so that the precoding matrix recovered by the network device based on the feedback of the terminal device can still be well adapted to the channel.
  • Frequency domain vector a vector used in the embodiment of the present application to represent the change rule of the channel in the frequency domain.
  • Each frequency domain vector can represent a variation law. Since the signal is transmitted through the wireless channel, the transmitting antenna can reach the receiving antenna through multiple paths. Multipath delay causes frequency selective fading, which is the change of frequency domain channel. Therefore, different frequency domain vectors can be used to represent the change law of the channel in the frequency domain caused by the delay on different transmission paths.
  • the frequency domain vector is denoted as v.
  • the length of the frequency domain vector can be written as N f , N f ⁇ 1, and it is an integer.
  • the design of the length N f of the frequency domain vector will be described in detail in the following embodiments, and the detailed description of the length of the frequency domain vector will be omitted here.
  • Frequency domain vector set It can include frequency domain vectors of different lengths. One or more frequency domain vectors in the set of frequency domain vectors are selected to construct a precoding vector.
  • the set of frequency domain vectors may include multiple frequency domain vectors.
  • the multiple frequency domain vectors may be orthogonal to each other.
  • Each frequency domain vector in the set of frequency domain vectors can be taken from a Discrete Fourier Transform (Discrete Fourier Transform, DFT) matrix.
  • DFT Discrete Fourier Transform
  • the N f frequency domain vectors can be written as The N f frequency domain vectors can construct a matrix B f ,
  • the frequency-domain vector set can be extended oversampling factor O f O f ⁇ N f is the frequency-domain vectors.
  • the frequency-domain vector set may comprise O f subsets, each subset may include N f frequency-domain vectors.
  • the N f frequency domain vectors in each subset can be orthogonal to each other.
  • Each subset can be called an orthogonal group.
  • Each frequency domain vector in the set of frequency domain vectors can be taken from an oversampled DFT matrix.
  • the oversampling factor O f is a positive integer.
  • the N f frequency domain vectors in the o f (0 ⁇ o f ⁇ O f -1 and o f are integers) subsets of the set of frequency domain vectors can be written as Then, based on the N f frequency domain vectors in the o f th subset, a matrix can be constructed
  • each frequency domain vector in the set of frequency domain vectors can be taken from a DFT matrix or an oversampled DFT matrix.
  • Each column vector in the set of frequency domain vectors may be referred to as a DFT vector or an oversampled DFT vector.
  • the frequency domain vector may be a DFT vector or an oversampled DFT vector.
  • the frequency domain vector group may refer to a set of frequency domain vectors composed of mutually orthogonal vectors in the DFT matrix, or may refer to a subset in the oversampling DFT matrix.
  • each frequency domain vector in the frequency domain vector group is orthogonal to each other. Therefore, the frequency domain vector set may include one or more frequency domain vector groups.
  • Spatial vector spatial domain vector
  • Each element in the airspace vector may represent the weight of each antenna port. Based on the weight of each antenna port represented by each element in the space vector, linearly superimposing the signals of each antenna port can form a region with a strong signal in a certain direction in space.
  • the space vector is denoted as u.
  • the length of the space vector u can be the number of transmit antenna ports N s in one polarization direction, N s ⁇ 1 and an integer.
  • the space domain vector may be, for example, a column vector or a row vector of length N s . This application does not limit this.
  • the airspace vector please refer to the two-dimensional (2dimensions, 2D)-DFT vector or oversampling 2D-DFT vector v l,m defined in the Type II codebook of the NR protocol TS 38.214 version 15 (release 15, R15) For brevity, they are not described in detail here.
  • Airspace vector set can include a variety of airspace vectors of different lengths to correspond to different numbers of transmit antenna ports.
  • the length of the airspace vector is N s
  • the length of each airspace vector in the airspace vector set to which the airspace vector reported by the terminal device belongs is N s .
  • the set of space domain vectors may include N s space domain vectors, and the N s space domain vectors may be orthogonal to each other.
  • Each space vector in the set of space vectors can be taken from a two-dimensional (2dimension, 2D)-DFT matrix. Among them, 2D can represent two different directions, such as a horizontal direction and a vertical direction.
  • the N s space vectors can be written as
  • the N s space domain vectors can construct the matrix B s .
  • the set of space domain vectors can be expanded to O s ⁇ N s space domain vectors by an oversampling factor O s .
  • the set of space domain vectors may include O s subsets, and each subset may include N s space domain vectors.
  • the N s space vectors in each subset can be orthogonal to each other.
  • Each subset can be called an orthogonal group.
  • Each space vector in the set of space vectors can be taken from an oversampled 2D-DFT matrix.
  • the oversampling factor O s is a positive integer.
  • O s O 1 ⁇ O 2
  • O 1 may be an oversampling factor in the horizontal direction
  • O 2 may be an oversampling factor in the vertical direction.
  • O 1 ⁇ 1, O 2 ⁇ 1, O 1 and O 2 are not 1 at the same time, and are both integers.
  • the N s space domain vectors in the o s (0 ⁇ o s ⁇ O s -1 and o s are integers) subsets of the set of space domain vectors can be written as Then based on the N s space vectors in the o s subset, a matrix can be constructed
  • each space vector in the set of space vectors can be taken from a DFT matrix or an oversampled DFT matrix.
  • Each column vector in the set of space vectors may be referred to as a DFT vector.
  • the spatial domain vector may be a DFT vector.
  • the spatial domain vector group may refer to a set of spatial domain vectors composed of two mutually orthogonal vectors in the DFT matrix, or may refer to a subset in the oversampling DFT matrix.
  • each space vector in the space vector group is orthogonal to each other. Therefore, the set of airspace vectors may include one or more groups of airspace vectors.
  • Frequency domain unit a unit of frequency domain resources, which can represent different frequency domain resource granularities.
  • the frequency domain unit may include, for example but not limited to, subband, resource block (resource block (RB), subcarrier, resource block group (RBG) or precoding resource block group (PRG), etc. .
  • the precoding matrix corresponding to the frequency domain unit may refer to the precoding matrix determined based on channel measurement and feedback based on the reference signal on the frequency domain unit.
  • the precoding matrix corresponding to the frequency domain unit can be used for precoding subsequent data transmitted through the frequency domain unit.
  • the precoding matrix or precoding vector corresponding to the frequency domain unit may also be simply referred to as the precoding matrix or precoding vector of the frequency domain unit.
  • Space frequency component matrix can be determined by a space domain vector and a frequency domain vector.
  • a space-frequency component matrix can be determined by, for example, the conjugate transposition of a space-domain vector and a frequency-domain vector, such as u ⁇ v H , and its dimension can be N s ⁇ N f .
  • the space-frequency component matrix may be an expression form of a basic unit of space-frequency determined by a space-domain vector and a frequency-domain vector.
  • the space-frequency basic unit can also be represented as a space-frequency component vector, for example, which can be determined by the Kronecker product of a space-domain vector and a frequency-domain vector; the space-frequency basic unit can also be represented, for example. Space-frequency vector equivalent.
  • This application does not limit the specific manifestation of the basic unit of space frequency. Based on the same conception, those skilled in the art should consider that all possible forms determined by one space domain vector and one frequency domain vector should fall within the scope of protection of the present application.
  • the operation relationship between the space frequency component matrix and the space domain vector and frequency domain vector may also be different. This application does not limit the operation relationship between the space-frequency component matrix, the space-domain vector, and the frequency-domain vector.
  • the space-frequency matrix can be understood as an intermediate quantity for determining the precoding matrix.
  • the space frequency matrix may be determined by the precoding matrix or the channel matrix.
  • the space-frequency matrix may be obtained by weighted sum of multiple space-frequency component matrices, which is used to recover the downlink channel or the precoding matrix.
  • the space-frequency component matrix can be expressed as a matrix of dimension N s ⁇ N f
  • the space-frequency matrix can also be expressed as a matrix of dimension N s ⁇ N f
  • the space-frequency matrix whose dimension is N s ⁇ N f may include N f column vectors of length N s .
  • the N f column vectors may correspond to N f frequency domain units, and each column vector may be used to determine the corresponding precoding vector of the frequency domain unit.
  • the space-frequency matrix can be written as H, Among them, w 1 to Are N f column vectors corresponding to N f frequency domain units, and the length of each column vector may be N s .
  • the N f column vectors can be used to determine the precoding vectors of N f frequency domain units, respectively.
  • the space-frequency matrix is only one form of expression for determining the intermediate quantity of the precoding matrix, and should not constitute any limitation to this application.
  • a vector of length N s ⁇ N f can also be obtained. This vector can be called Space frequency vector.
  • the dimensions of the space-frequency matrix and space-frequency vector shown above are only examples, and should not constitute any limitation to this application.
  • the space-frequency matrix may also be a matrix of dimension N f ⁇ N s .
  • Each row vector may correspond to a frequency domain unit, which is used to determine the corresponding precoding vector of the frequency domain unit.
  • the dimension of the space-frequency matrix can be further expanded.
  • the dimension of the space-frequency matrix may be 2N s ⁇ N f or N f ⁇ 2N s . It should be understood that the number of polarization directions of the transmitting antenna is not limited in this application.
  • Channel state information reference signal can be used for downlink channel measurement and interference measurement.
  • the CSI-RS is mainly used for downlink channel measurement.
  • the network device can transmit the CSI-RS on pre-configured time-frequency resources.
  • the terminal device may receive the CSI-RS on the pre-configured time-frequency resource, so as to perform downlink channel measurement according to the received CSI-RS.
  • CSI-RS is only one possible reference signal for channel measurement, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. This application does not exclude the possibility of defining other reference signals that can be used to implement the same or similar functions in future agreements.
  • reporting bandwidth may refer to the reporting bandwidth (csi-ReportingBand) in the CSI reporting configuration (CSI-ReportConfig) via the information element (IE) with the network device. ) The bandwidth corresponding to the field.
  • the bandwidth corresponding to the csi-ReportingBand may be the reporting bandwidth.
  • the terminal device can receive the CSI-RS on the reporting bandwidth to perform channel measurement and reporting.
  • the reporting bandwidth may be the bandwidth occupied by the CSI-RS on which the terminal device performs CSI reporting once.
  • the reported bandwidth may be the bandwidth occupied by the CSI-RS resource in the frequency domain.
  • the frequency domain occupied bandwidth of the CSI-RS resource can be configured by IE-CSI frequency domain occupied bandwidth (CSI-FrequencyOccupation).
  • the network device may further indicate the number and location of subbands (that is, an example of frequency domain units) to be reported through the csi-ReportingBand field.
  • This field can be a bitmap.
  • the length of the bitmap may be the number of subbands included in the reported bandwidth. In other words, the bandwidth occupied by the first indication bit to the last indication bit in the bitmap may be the aforementioned reporting bandwidth.
  • Each indicator bit in the bitmap may correspond to a subband in the reported bandwidth.
  • Each indicator bit is used to indicate whether the corresponding subband needs to report CSI. For example, when the indication bit is set to "1", the corresponding subband needs to report CSI; when the indication bit is set to "0", the corresponding subband does not need to report CSI. It should be understood that the meanings expressed by the values of the indication bits listed here are only examples, and should not constitute any limitation to this application.
  • the signaling for configuring the reporting bandwidth and the signaling for indicating the subband to be reported are only examples, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. This application does not limit the signaling used to indicate the reporting bandwidth, the signaling used to indicate the subband to be reported, and the specific indication method.
  • N f length of frequency domain vector, N f ⁇ 1 and an integer
  • N s the length of the space vector, N s ⁇ 1 and an integer
  • M the number of frequency domain vectors reported, M ⁇ 1 and an integer
  • L the number of reported space vectors, L ⁇ 1 and an integer
  • K the number of reported weighting coefficients, K ⁇ 1 and an integer
  • R number of transmission layers, R ⁇ 1 and an integer.
  • consecutive numbering may be started from 0.
  • the R transmission layers may include the 0th transmission layer to the R-1 transmission layer;
  • the L spatial domain vectors may include the 0th spatial domain vector to the L-1 spatial domain vector, and so on, here No more examples will be given.
  • the specific implementation is not limited to this, for example, it may be consecutively numbered starting from 1. It should be understood that the foregoing descriptions are all settings that are convenient for describing the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application, and are not intended to limit the scope of the present application.
  • the space domain vector and the frequency domain vector are both column vectors as an example to illustrate the embodiment provided by this application, but this should not constitute any limitation to this application. Based on the same conception, those skilled in the art can also think of other possible expressions.
  • "for indicating” may include both for direct indication and for indirect indication.
  • the indication information may include direct indication I or indirect indication I, but does not mean that the indication information must carry I.
  • the information indicated by the indication information is called information to be indicated.
  • the information to be indicated can be directly indicated, such as the information to be indicated itself or the Indication index etc.
  • the information to be indicated may also be indirectly indicated by indicating other information, where there is an association relationship between the other information and the information to be indicated. It is also possible to indicate only a part of the information to be indicated, while other parts of the information to be indicated are known or agreed in advance. For example, it is also possible to achieve the indication of specific information by means of the arrangement order of various information pre-agreed (for example, stipulated in a protocol), thereby reducing the indication overhead to a certain extent.
  • the precoding matrix is composed of precoding vectors, and each precoding vector in the precoding matrix may have the same part in terms of composition or other attributes.
  • the specific indication method may also be various existing indication methods, such as, but not limited to, the above indication methods and various combinations thereof.
  • various indication methods reference may be made to the prior art, and details are not repeated herein. It can be seen from the above that, for example, when multiple information of the same type needs to be indicated, there may be cases where different information is indicated in different ways.
  • the required indication method can be selected according to specific needs. The embodiments of the present application do not limit the selected indication method. In this way, the indication methods involved in the embodiments of the present application should be understood as covering Fang obtains various methods of the information to be indicated.
  • row vectors can be expressed as column vectors
  • a matrix can be represented by the transposed matrix of the matrix
  • a matrix can also be expressed in the form of a vector or an array, which is a vector or an array It can be formed by connecting the row vectors or column vectors of the matrix to each other.
  • the Kronecker product of two vectors can also be expressed by the product of one vector and the transposed vector of another vector.
  • the information to be indicated may be sent together as a whole, or may be divided into multiple sub-information and sent separately, and the sending period and/or sending timing of these sub-information may be the same or different.
  • the specific sending method is not limited in this application.
  • the sending period and/or sending timing of these sub-information may be pre-defined, for example, pre-defined according to a protocol, or may be configured by the transmitting end device by sending configuration information to the receiving end device.
  • the configuration information may include, for example but not limited to, radio resource control signaling, such as RRC signaling, MAC layer signaling, such as MAC-CE signaling, and physical layer signaling, such as downlink control information (downlink control information, DCI) One or a combination of at least two of them.
  • pre-defined can be achieved by pre-storing corresponding codes, tables, or other methods that can be used to indicate relevant information in devices (for example, including terminal devices and network devices), This application does not limit its specific implementation.
  • “save” may mean saving in one or more memories.
  • the one or more memories may be set separately, or may be integrated in an encoder or decoder, a processor, or a communication device.
  • the one or more memories may also be partly set separately and partly integrated in a decoder, processor, or communication device.
  • the type of memory may be any form of storage medium, which is not limited in this application.
  • the “protocol” involved in the embodiments of the present application may refer to a standard protocol in the communication field, and may include, for example, the LTE protocol, the NR protocol, and related protocols applied in future communication systems, which are not limited in this application.
  • At least one of a, b, and c may represent: a, or, b, or, c, or, a and b, or, a and c, or, b and c, or, a , B and c.
  • a, b and c may be single or multiple.
  • the method provided by the embodiments of the present application may be applied to a system that communicates through multi-antenna technology, for example, the communication system 100 shown in FIG. 1.
  • the communication system may include at least one network device and at least one terminal device.
  • Multi-antenna technology can communicate between network equipment and terminal equipment.
  • the embodiments shown below do not specifically limit the specific structure of the execution body of the method provided in the embodiments of the present application, as long as the program that records the code of the method provided in the embodiments of the present application can be executed to
  • the method provided in the embodiment of the application may be used for communication.
  • the execution body of the method provided in the embodiment of the present application may be a terminal device or a network device, or a functional module in the terminal device or network device that can call a program and execute the program.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic flowchart of a vector indication method 200 for constructing a precoding vector provided by an embodiment of the present application from the perspective of device interaction. As shown, the method 200 may include steps 210 to 250. The steps of this method are explained in detail below.
  • the terminal device In step 210, the terminal device generates first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate one or more frequency domain vectors.
  • the one or more frequency domain vectors can be used to construct a precoding vector for one or more frequency domain units in a frequency domain unit group.
  • the one or more frequency domain vectors indicated by the first indication information may be frequency domain vectors determined by the terminal device based on the frequency domain unit group for channel measurement and reported to the network device.
  • the one or more frequency domain vectors indicated by the first indication information are the frequency domain vectors to be reported, or the selected frequency domain vectors.
  • the terminal device may first determine one or more frequency domain unit groups from the reported bandwidth. For each frequency domain unit group, the terminal device may determine the length of the frequency domain vector according to the position of the frequency domain unit to be reported in the frequency domain unit group, and then determine the frequency domain vector to be reported from the corresponding frequency domain vector set.
  • the network device may transmit the CSI-RS on the frequency domain unit included in the reported bandwidth.
  • the terminal device may feed back CSI to some or all of the frequency domain units according to the instructions of the network device.
  • the frequency domain unit indicated by the network device and requiring CSI feedback may be referred to as a frequency domain unit to be reported, or a frequency domain unit to be fed back.
  • the frequency domain unit to be reported may be a subband to be reported indicated by the network device through the csi-ReportingBand described above, or may be a frequency domain unit of other granularity corresponding to the subband to be reported.
  • corresponding to the subband to be reported may refer to that the frequency domain unit to be reported occupies the same frequency band on the frequency domain resource as the subband to be reported, but the reporting granularity may be different.
  • the frequency domain unit to be reported please refer to the relevant description in conjunction with FIG. 3 to FIG. 5 below.
  • one frequency domain unit group may include one or more frequency domain units to be reported.
  • the bandwidth occupied by a frequency domain unit group may be part or all of the reported bandwidth. In other words, a frequency domain unit group can be a subset of the reported bandwidth.
  • the terminal device For each frequency domain unit group, the terminal device can determine the frequency domain vector to be reported by the method provided in this application. Therefore, after receiving the configuration signaling for reporting the bandwidth, the terminal device may first determine the frequency domain unit group, and then determine the frequency domain vector to be reported based on each frequency domain unit group.
  • the method 200 further includes: the terminal device determining the frequency domain unit group from the reported bandwidth.
  • the terminal device may determine the frequency domain unit group from the reported bandwidth according to a predefined rule.
  • the protocol may predefine rules for determining the frequency domain unit group from the reported bandwidth.
  • the rule may be, for example, to use all frequency domain units in the reported bandwidth as a group of frequency domain units.
  • the terminal device After receiving the configuration signaling of the reported bandwidth, the terminal device, as described above in the CSI-FrequencyOccupation, can use all the reported bandwidth as the above-mentioned frequency domain unit group to determine the frequency domain vector to be reported.
  • FIG. 3 shows an example of the frequency domain unit group and the reported bandwidth. As shown in the figure, FIG. 3 shows the reporting bandwidth including 40 frequency domain units. Each shaded square in the picture Represents a frequency domain unit to be reported.
  • the bandwidth occupied by the frequency domain unit group shown in FIG. 3 is the entire bandwidth of the reported bandwidth. That is, the frequency domain unit group includes 40 frequency domain units, of which there are 29 frequency domain units to be reported.
  • the rule may also be that when the number of frequency domain units between two adjacent frequency domain units in the reporting bandwidth is greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold, the two adjacent Between frequency domain units, the reported bandwidth is divided into two parts, which belong to two frequency domain unit groups, respectively.
  • the threshold may be defined in advance, for example, as defined by a protocol.
  • the rule may also be that the ratio of the number of frequency domain units spaced between two adjacent frequency domain units in the reporting bandwidth to the number of frequency domain units in the reporting bandwidth is greater than or equal to a certain
  • the reporting bandwidth is divided into two segments from the two adjacent frequency domain units to be reported, which belong to two frequency domain unit groups, respectively.
  • the threshold may be defined in advance, for example, as defined by a protocol.
  • the terminal device may further determine whether the frequency domain units to be reported in the reported bandwidth are continuous. In the case of poor continuity, the reported bandwidth can be divided into two or more frequency domain unit groups.
  • FIG. 4 shows an example of dividing the reporting bandwidth into two frequency domain unit groups. As shown in the figure, FIG. 4 shows the reporting bandwidth including 40 frequency domain units. Each shaded square in the picture Represents a frequency domain unit to be reported.
  • the bandwidth occupied by the frequency domain unit group shown in FIG. 4 is part of the bandwidth of the reported bandwidth.
  • Fig. 4 shows two frequency domain unit groups.
  • One frequency domain unit group contains 18 frequency domain units, among which there are 12 frequency domain units to be reported; the other frequency domain unit group contains 11 frequency domain units. There are 8 frequency domain units to be reported.
  • FIG. 4 is only an example. According to the number of frequency domain units spaced between two adjacent frequency domain units to be reported, the reporting bandwidth may also be divided into more frequency domain unit groups.
  • the rule may further include that, when the number of frequency domain units spaced between two adjacent frequency domain units to be reported is greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold, from the two adjacent frequency domains to be reported Between units, the reporting bandwidth is divided into two or more sections, and the frequency domain units that do not need to be reported at the head and tail of each section are removed to form two or more frequency domain unit groups.
  • the frequency domain unit group on the left in FIG. 4 may not include the first frequency domain unit that does not need to be reported, and the frequency domain unit group on the right may not include the last frequency domain unit that does not need to be reported.
  • This application does not limit the specific rules for determining frequency domain unit groups.
  • FIG. 3 and FIG. 4 are only for the purpose of understanding the relationship between the frequency domain unit group and the reported bandwidth.
  • the granularity of the frequency domain unit in the frequency domain unit group in the figure is the same as the granularity of the reported bandwidth, but this should not constitute the application Any limitation.
  • This application does not limit the relationship between the granularity of frequency domain units in the frequency domain unit group and the granularity of frequency domain units in the reporting bandwidth.
  • the granularity of the frequency domain unit in the frequency domain unit group exemplified below in conjunction with FIG. 5 is different from the granularity of the frequency domain unit in the reporting bandwidth.
  • the protocol may be pre-defined, and the reported bandwidth is divided into multiple frequency domain unit groups on average, and each frequency domain unit group includes the same number of frequency domain units.
  • the terminal device may determine the frequency domain unit group from the reported bandwidth according to the instruction of the network device.
  • the network device may instruct the terminal device through signaling, and the currently configured reporting bandwidth may include several frequency domain unit groups and the frequency domain units included in each frequency domain unit group.
  • the frequency domain unit to be reported in the reporting bandwidth may be notified by the network device to the terminal device through signaling.
  • the method 200 further includes: Step 220, the terminal device receives second indication information, and the second indication information may be used to indicate the position and number of frequency domain units to be reported in the reporting bandwidth.
  • the network device sends the second indication information.
  • the second indication information may be csi-ReportingBand in IE-CSI-ReportConfig.
  • the network device can indicate the subband to be reported through the csi-ReportingBand.
  • the csi-ReportingBand can be a bitmap with the same length as the number of subbands included in the reporting bandwidth, so that each indicator bit in the bitmap indicates whether the corresponding subband is the subband to be reported band. Since csi-ReportingBand has been described in detail above, it will not be repeated here for brevity.
  • the number of frequency domain units to be reported described above may be equal to the number of subbands to be reported indicated by csi-ReportingBand number. If the granularity of the frequency domain unit on which the terminal device reports the first indication information is smaller than the granularity of the subband, the number of frequency domain units to be reported as described above may be greater than the number of subbands indicated by csi-ReportingBand . For example, the number of frequency domain units to be reported may be an integer multiple of the number of subbands to be reported indicated by csi-ReportingBand.
  • the number of resource blocks (RBs) contained in each subband may be an integer multiple of the number of RBs contained in each frequency domain unit. If the ratio of the granularity of the subband to the granularity of the frequency domain unit on which the first indication information is reported is recorded as ⁇ , ⁇ may be an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the network device indicates the subband to be reported through csi-ReportingBand, which also indicates the frequency domain unit to be reported.
  • the granularity of the frequency domain unit on which the terminal device reports the first indication information may be a subband, or may be other granularity.
  • the terminal device can determine to be reported according to the second indication information Position and number of frequency domain units.
  • the granularity of the frequency domain unit to be reported and the granularity of the frequency domain unit on which the first indication information is reported are defined as the same granularity.
  • FIG. 5 shows an example of second indication information, reporting bandwidth, and frequency domain unit group.
  • the second indication information may indicate the number and position of subbands to be reported through a bitmap.
  • the reporting bandwidth shown in the figure may include at least 10 subbands, and the ellipsis in the figure may indicate one or more subbands.
  • Each subband may correspond to an indicator bit in the bitmap.
  • the subband corresponding to the bit with the indication bit set to "1" may be the subband to be reported.
  • the frequency domain unit group may occupy part or all of the reported bandwidth.
  • the frequency domain unit group shown in the figure occupies part of the reported bandwidth.
  • the granularity of the frequency domain units in the frequency domain unit group may be smaller than the subband.
  • the granularity of the frequency domain unit shown in the figure is 1/4 of the subband granularity.
  • N 2 represents the sequence number of the subband to be reported corresponding to the last frequency domain unit in the frequency domain unit group to be reported in the reporting bandwidth
  • N 1 represents the first frequency to be reported in the frequency domain unit group
  • the sequence number M 1 of the sub-band to be reported corresponding to the domain unit in the reporting bandwidth indicates the number of frequency-domain units to be reported contained in the first sub-band to be reported
  • M 2 indicates that the last sub-band to be reported contains
  • the number of frequency domain units to be reported; N 1 ⁇ 1, N 2 ⁇ 1, M 1 ⁇ 1, M 2 ⁇ 1, and N 1 , N 2 , M 1 and M 2 are all integers.
  • M 1 and M 2 are introduced because it is considered that when the first frequency domain unit to be reported happens to be the first subband in the reported bandwidth, or the last frequency domain unit to be reported happens to be the last subband in the reported bandwidth
  • the ratio of the granularity of the first subband or the last subband of the reported bandwidth to the granularity of the frequency domain unit on which the first indication information is reported may not be ⁇ .
  • the calculation formula for determining the Q value shown above is only an example, and should not constitute any limitation to this application.
  • N 1 ' ⁇ 1, N 2 ' ⁇ 1, and N 1 'and N 2' are integers.
  • FIG. 5 is only an example for ease of understanding, and should not constitute any limitation to this application.
  • the relationship between the granularity of the frequency domain unit to be reported, the granularity of the frequency domain unit to be reported and the granularity of subbands, the relationship between the frequency domain unit group and the reported bandwidth, and the number of subbands (ie, bits) included in the reported bandwidth is not limited.
  • each subband in the bandwidth occupied by the frequency domain of the reported bandwidth shown in FIG. 5 is only an example, and should not constitute any limitation to this application.
  • each subband in the bandwidth occupied by the frequency domain of the reported bandwidth may also be numbered from 1 or from other values. Regardless of the numbering, the number of subbands contained in the bandwidth from the first subband to be reported to the last subband to be reported remains the same, or from the first subband to be reported to the last subband to be reported The number Q of frequency domain units contained in the bandwidth occupied by the band does not change.
  • the csi-ReportingBand in the IE-CSI-ReportConfig listed above is only an example of the second indication information, and should not constitute any limitation to this application.
  • This application does not exclude the possibility of indicating the number and location of frequency domain units to be reported through other existing signaling or through newly added signaling.
  • the number and location of frequency domain units to be reported are indicated by existing signaling or newly added signaling, it may be indicated based on the same or different granularity as the frequency domain unit to be reported. This application does not limit this.
  • the length N f of the frequency domain vector can be from the number of frequency domain units in the bandwidth occupied by the frequency domain unit from the first frequency domain unit to be reported to the last frequency domain unit to be reported in the frequency domain unit group determine.
  • N f Q.
  • a set of frequency domain vectors of different lengths can be predefined in the frequency domain vector set.
  • the terminal device determines the Q value, it can directly select a frequency domain vector with a length equal to the Q value from the frequency domain vector set for reporting.
  • the Q value is 38, and a frequency domain vector with a length of 38 can be selected.
  • the Q values are 17 and 10, respectively, and frequency domain vectors with lengths of 17 and 10 can be selected.
  • the Q value is 20, and a frequency domain vector with a length of 20 can be selected.
  • N f Q.
  • the terminal device determines the Q value, it can select a frequency domain vector with a length greater than the Q value from the set of frequency domain vectors.
  • frequency domain vectors with lengths ⁇ 4, 8, 12, 24, 48 ⁇ can be defined in the frequency domain vector set.
  • the terminal device may select a frequency domain vector whose length is greater than the Q value.
  • the Q value is 38, and a frequency domain vector with a length of 48 can be selected.
  • Q values are 17 and 10, respectively, and frequency domain vectors with lengths of 24 and 12 can be selected.
  • the Q value is 20, and a frequency domain vector with a length of 24 can be selected.
  • the Q values and the lengths of the frequency domain vectors listed above are only examples for easy understanding, and should not constitute any limitation to this application.
  • the Q value may be defined as The granularity of the reported frequency domain unit corresponds to the granularity of the frequency domain unit in the reporting bandwidth configured by the signaling (for example, the aforementioned subband). This application does not limit this.
  • the granularity of the frequency domain unit in reporting bandwidth is the same as the granularity of the frequency domain unit on which the first indication information is reported.
  • all are subbands.
  • this should not constitute any limitation on this application.
  • the terminal device After determining the length of the frequency domain vector, the terminal device can further determine the frequency domain vector to be reported.
  • the terminal device separately determines the frequency domain vector to be reported based on each transmission layer. That is to say, the frequency domain vectors used to determine the precoding vectors of the frequency domain units on each transmission layer may be independent of each other.
  • the terminal device may perform channel measurement based on the reference signal received on the frequency domain unit group, such as CSI-RS, to determine each transmission layer and each frequency domain in the frequency domain unit group
  • the precoding vector corresponding to the unit may refer to the prior art, and for the sake of brevity, a detailed description of the specific process is omitted here.
  • the terminal device can construct a space-frequency matrix corresponding to the transmission layer according to the precoding vectors of each frequency-domain unit on the same transmission layer, and can determine the frequency-domain vector to be reported by performing DFT of the space-frequency matrix on the space-frequency and frequency-domain.
  • H r represents a space-frequency matrix constructed by the precoding vectors corresponding to each frequency domain unit on the r-th (0 ⁇ r ⁇ R-1) transmission layer in the R transmission layers.
  • B s represents a matrix constructed by a group of space domain vectors in a predefined set of space domain vectors.
  • B f represents a matrix constructed by a group of frequency domain vectors in a set of predefined frequency domain vectors.
  • the length of each frequency domain vector in the frequency domain vector set may be determined by the method described above.
  • C represents the coefficient matrix obtained by DFT.
  • the terminal device performs space and frequency domain DFT on the space frequency matrix
  • the terminal device performs space and frequency domain DFT on the space frequency matrix
  • the terminal device performs spatial and frequency domain DFT on the spatial frequency matrix to determine the frequency domain vector and the spatial domain vector described later.
  • the specific process of the weighting coefficient is similar to that of the specific process. For details, please refer to the prior art. For brevity, a detailed description of the specific process is omitted here.
  • the terminal device may determine one or more strong columns, for example, M r , from the coefficient matrix C. M r ⁇ 1 and an integer.
  • the terminal device may determine, for example, one or more columns with a larger sum of squares of the modulus according to the magnitude of the square sum of the modulus of each column element in the coefficient matrix C.
  • the stronger the coefficient matrix C M r of columns can be used to determine a plurality of frequency domain or frequency-domain vectors in the vector set selected.
  • the numbers of the strong M r columns in the coefficient matrix C may be the numbers of the selected M r column vectors in the matrix B f constructed by the frequency domain vector set. Therefore, the frequency domain vector reported for the rth transmission layer can be determined based on the space frequency matrix corresponding to the rth transmission layer.
  • the number of frequency domain vectors to be reported may be indicated by the network device through signaling, or may be determined and reported by the terminal device by itself, or may be defined in advance, such as a protocol definition. This application does not limit this.
  • the space frequency matrix may be filled with zeros.
  • N sb the number of frequency domain units to be reported is N sb , N f >N sb ⁇ 1 and an integer.
  • the dimension of the space-frequency matrix is N t ⁇ N sb , and the matrix can be filled with zero elements of N f -N sb columns to obtain a matrix of dimension N t ⁇ N f for DFT.
  • the terminal device and the network device may be pre-agreed N f -N sb zero element column filled before N sb columns or after space-frequency matrix.
  • the terminal device may fill the N f -N sb column zero elements in the N sb column of the space frequency matrix, and after receiving the first indication information fed back by the terminal device, the network device may recover the first indication information
  • the first N sb columns of the matrix with the dimension N t ⁇ N f are extracted to obtain the space-frequency matrix with the dimension N t ⁇ N sb .
  • the method of determining the frequency domain vector to be reported by the terminal device in the case of N f >N sb listed here is only an example, and should not constitute any limitation to this application.
  • the specific method for the terminal device to determine the frequency domain vector to be reported and the specific method for the network device to restore the precoding vector are internal implementation behaviors, which are not limited in this application.
  • the terminal device may further generate indication information of the frequency domain vector to be reported.
  • the terminal device may indicate the frequency domain vector to be reported by the index of the frequency domain vector combined in the frequency domain vector set, or may indicate each frequency domain vector by the index of each frequency domain vector to be reported, or by bit
  • the figure indicates the frequency domain vector to be reported, which is not limited in this application.
  • the specific method for the terminal device to report the frequency domain vector can refer to the prior art. For example, reference can be made to the specific method for the terminal device to report the air domain vector in the feedback mode of the type II codebook.
  • the first indication information can also be used to indicate one or more airspace vectors.
  • the space domain vector and weighting coefficient reported for the rth transport layer can be determined by the coefficient matrix C obtained by the above DFT.
  • the terminal device may determine one or more strong rows from the coefficient matrix C to determine one or more space domain vectors, for example, L r , L r ⁇ 1 and an integer.
  • the sequence numbers of the strong L r rows in the coefficient matrix C may be the sequence numbers of the selected L r column vectors in the matrix U s constructed by the spatial domain vector set.
  • the number of airspace vectors to be reported may be indicated by the network device through signaling, or may be determined and reported by the terminal device by itself, or may be defined in advance, such as protocol definition. This application does not limit this.
  • the terminal device may further generate indication information of the airspace vector to be reported.
  • the terminal device may indicate the airspace vector to be reported by the index of the airspace vector combined in the airspace vector set, or may indicate each airspace vector by the index of each airspace vector to be reported, and may also indicate the to be reported by the bitmap.
  • the airspace vector of this is not limited in this application.
  • the specific method of reporting the airspace vector by the terminal device can refer to the prior art. For example, reference may be made to the specific method of reporting the airspace vector by the terminal device in the feedback method of the type II codebook.
  • the one or more space domain vectors may be determined by the terminal device based on channel measurement, or may be pre-configured.
  • the protocol may predefine that some or all of the space domain vectors in the space domain vector set are used to construct the space frequency matrix;
  • it may also be determined by the network device, for example, the network device may determine one or more airspace vectors according to the reciprocity of the uplink and downlink channels. This application does not limit the determination method of the airspace vector.
  • the first indication information can also be used to indicate one or more weighting coefficients.
  • the stronger M r columns and the stronger L r rows in the coefficient matrix C can construct a coefficient matrix C′ with dimensions L r ⁇ M r .
  • the L r ⁇ M r elements in the coefficient matrix C′ are all weighting coefficients.
  • 0 ⁇ l r ⁇ L r -1,0 ⁇ m r ⁇ M r -1, l r and m r are integers.
  • the coefficient matrix C′ may include one or more elements whose amplitude quantization value is zero. For one or more elements whose quantized value of the amplitude is zero, the terminal device may not report.
  • the number of reported weighting coefficients may be pre-configured, for example, pre-defined, such as protocol definition, or indicated by the network device through signaling. This application does not limit this.
  • reporting the number of weighting coefficients may be denoted as K r, 1 ⁇ K r ⁇ L r ⁇ M r, and K r is an integer.
  • the K r weighting coefficients may be a subset of L r ⁇ M r elements in the above coefficient matrix C′.
  • a spatial vector r L hereinabove and M r of said frequency-domain vectors constructed L r ⁇ M r null frequency component of the matrix can be used for part or all of the weighted sum, to obtain the first r Weighting coefficients corresponding to each transport layer.
  • the coefficient matrix C′ may include one or more elements with a small amplitude, for example, the quantized value of the amplitude is zero, or close to zero, the number of weighting coefficients actually reported by the terminal device may be K r , Can also be less than K r , which is not limited in this application.
  • the terminal device may further generate indication information of the weighting coefficient to be reported.
  • the terminal device may indicate the weighting coefficient in a normalized manner, for example, which is not limited in this application.
  • the specific method for the terminal device to report the weighting coefficient can refer to the prior art. For example, reference can be made to the specific method for the terminal device to report the weighting coefficient in the feedback mode of the type II codebook.
  • the terminal device determines the space domain vector, the frequency domain vector, and the corresponding weighting coefficient.
  • the specific method by which the terminal device determines the space domain vector, the frequency domain vector, and the corresponding weighting coefficient is not limited to the above.
  • the terminal device can also use existing estimation algorithms, such as multiple signal classification algorithm (multiple signal classification classification algorithm, MUSIC), Bartlett algorithm or rotation invariant subspace algorithm (estimation of signature, parameters, via rotation, variation in technology, algorithm, algorithm). , ESPRIT), etc., to determine the space domain vector, frequency domain vector and the corresponding weighting coefficient.
  • the terminal device determines one or more frequency domain vectors that can be shared based on the R transmission layers. That is, the frequency domain units used to determine the precoding vectors of the frequency domain units on each transmission layer may be common.
  • the frequency domain vectors determined for any two transmission layers may be the same. For example, M (M ⁇ 1 and an integer) frequency domain vectors.
  • the terminal device may determine one or more frequency domain vectors according to the space-frequency matrices corresponding to the R transmission layers respectively.
  • the specific method for the terminal device to determine the frequency domain vector to be reported based on the R transmission layers may be similar to that described above, or may refer to the prior art. For brevity, I will not repeat them here.
  • the first indication information can also be used to indicate one or more airspace vectors.
  • the R transmission layers may share one or more space domain vectors. For example, L (L ⁇ 1 and an integer) space vectors.
  • the terminal device may determine L space domain vectors according to the space frequency matrix corresponding to the R transmission layers.
  • the specific method for the terminal device to determine the airspace vector to be reported based on the R transmission layers may be similar to that described above, or may refer to the prior art. For brevity, I will not repeat them here.
  • the one or more space domain vectors may be determined by the terminal device based on channel measurement, or may be pre-configured.
  • the protocol may predefine that some or all of the space domain vectors in the space domain vector set are used to construct the space frequency matrix;
  • it may also be determined by the network device, for example, the network device may determine one or more airspace vectors according to the reciprocity of the uplink and downlink channels. This application does not limit the determination method of the airspace vector.
  • the first indication information can also be used to indicate one or more weighting coefficients.
  • the specific method for the terminal device to determine the weighting coefficient is similar to that described above.
  • the number of reported weighting coefficients can be configured in advance. Since this has been explained in detail above, for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal device determines one or more frequency domain vectors based on each space domain vector. That is, the frequency domain vectors used to construct the space frequency component matrix with different space domain vectors may be independent of each other.
  • the specific method for the terminal device to determine the strong frequency vector or vectors is similar to that described above, and for the sake of brevity, it is not repeated here.
  • the airspace vector may be determined by the terminal device based on channel measurement.
  • the first indication information is also used to indicate one or more airspace vectors.
  • the airspace vector may also be indicated by the network device, or it may be pre-defined, which is not limited in this application.
  • the first indication information can also be used to indicate one or more weighting coefficients.
  • the specific method for the terminal device to determine the weighting coefficient is similar to that described above.
  • the number of reported weighting coefficients can be configured in advance. Since this has been explained in detail above, for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal device can also individually determine and report the broadband amplitude coefficient for each spatial domain vector.
  • the first indication information may also be used to indicate the broadband amplitude coefficient of each spatial domain vector in one or more spatial domain vectors.
  • the specific method for the terminal device to determine the broadband amplitude coefficient for each spatial domain vector can refer to the prior art, and for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
  • the application does not limit the correspondence between the frequency domain vector and the space domain vector, the correspondence relationship between the frequency domain vector and the transmission layer, and the specific determination method of the frequency domain vector.
  • This application does not limit the specific method for the terminal device to report the space domain vector, frequency domain vector, and weighting coefficient.
  • This application does not limit the number of spatial domain vectors, frequency domain vectors, and weighting coefficients reported by the terminal device.
  • the terminal device may determine and generate first indication information to be reported.
  • the distribution of frequency domain units to be reported in the reporting bandwidth is not continuous.
  • the frequency domain units to be reported are sparsely distributed in the reporting bandwidth.
  • the frequency domain unit to be reported may not have good frequency domain continuity. If the dual domain compression method described above is still used to feed back the precoding vector, it may not be able to communicate well with Downstream channel adaptation.
  • the terminal device may further determine whether to use the dual-domain compression method to feed back the precoding vector.
  • step 210 specifically includes the terminal device determining the first indication information when the frequency domain unit to be reported in the frequency domain unit group meets the preset condition.
  • the terminal device uses a dual-domain compression method to feed back the precoding vector, and then determines the first indication information.
  • the preset condition may be: the number of frequency domain units to be reported in the frequency domain unit group is greater than or equal to x ⁇ Q, x is a predefined value, and 0 ⁇ x ⁇ 1.
  • the ratio of the number of frequency domain units to be reported in the frequency domain unit group to Q is greater than or equal to x.
  • x 0.5.
  • the Q frequency domain units are composed of all frequency domain units in the first frequency domain unit to be reported in the frequency domain unit group to the last frequency domain unit to be reported, and may occupy part or all of the frequency domain unit group bandwidth.
  • the frequency domain unit to be reported occupies a large proportion in the Q frequency domain units, it may be considered that the distribution of the frequency domain unit to be reported is continuous, and the first indication information may be determined based on the method described above .
  • the terminal device may determine the first indication information based on the method described above.
  • the preset condition may be: the number of frequency domain units to be reported in the frequency domain unit group is greater than or equal to a predefined first threshold.
  • the first indication information may be determined based on the method described above.
  • the preset condition may be: the number of frequency domain units to be reported in the frequency domain unit group is greater than or equal to a predefined second threshold, and the Q value is greater than or equal to a predefined third threshold.
  • the first indication information may be determined based on the method described above.
  • the second threshold and the third threshold may be independent of each other, and the size relationship between the second threshold and the third threshold is not limited in this application.
  • the preset condition may be: the number of frequency domain units to be reported in the frequency domain unit group is greater than or equal to a predefined fourth threshold, and the number of frequency domain units to be reported in the frequency domain unit group is greater than or equal to y ⁇ Q, 0 ⁇ y ⁇ 1, y is a predefined value.
  • the first indication information may be determined based on the method described above.
  • the preset condition may be that the number of frequency domain units that do not need to be reported in the frequency domain unit group is less than or equal to a predefined fifth threshold, and the Q value is greater than or equal to a predefined sixth threshold.
  • the first indication information may be determined based on the method described above.
  • the preset condition may be: the number of frequency domain units that do not need to be reported in the frequency domain unit group is less than or equal to a predefined seventh threshold, and the number of frequency domain units that do not need to be reported are less than or equal to z ⁇ Q, 0 ⁇ z ⁇ 1, z and the sixth threshold are predefined values.
  • the first indication information may be determined based on the method described above.
  • the preset condition may be that the number of frequency domain units in the frequency domain unit group that does not need to be reported is less than or equal to the eighth threshold.
  • the frequency to be reported can be considered
  • the distribution of the domain units in the frequency domain unit group is relatively continuous, and the first indication information may be determined based on the method described above.
  • predefined values such as the first threshold to the seventh threshold and x, y, z, and so on.
  • the predefined values may be independent of each other, and the specific value of each predetermined value is not limited in this application.
  • the terminal device may determine the feedback method based on the preset condition, and the network device may also be based on the same preset condition.
  • the precoding vector is restored according to the received feedback.
  • step 230 the terminal device sends the first indication information.
  • the network device receives the first indication information.
  • the first indication information may be PMI, or some information elements in the PMI, or other information. This application does not limit this.
  • the first indication information may be carried in one or more messages in the prior art and sent by the terminal device to the network device, or may be carried in one or more messages newly designed in the present application and sent by the terminal device to the network device.
  • the terminal device may send the first indication information to the network device through physical uplink resources, such as a physical uplink shared channel (physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) or a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH), to facilitate the network device
  • PUSCH physical uplink shared channel
  • PUCCH physical uplink control channel
  • the specific method for the terminal device to send the first indication information to the network device through the physical uplink resource may be the same as that in the prior art, and for the sake of brevity, a detailed description of its specific process is omitted here.
  • step 240 the network device determines one or more frequency domain vectors according to the first indication information.
  • the network device may determine one or more frequency domain vectors fed back by the terminal device according to the first indication information.
  • the method for the network device to determine one or more frequency domain vectors according to the first indication information corresponds to the method for the terminal device to determine the frequency domain vectors.
  • the network device may separately determine one or more frequency domain vectors corresponding to each transmission layer. If the terminal device reports one or more frequency domain vectors based on the R transmission layers, the terminal device may determine one or more frequency domain vectors that can be shared by the R transmission layers. If the terminal device reports one or more frequency domain vectors based on each space domain vector, the network device may separately determine one or more frequency domain vectors corresponding to each space domain vector.
  • the method for the terminal device to determine one or more frequency domain vectors according to the first indication information corresponds to the method for the indication information for the frequency domain vectors of the terminal device.
  • the network device may determine one or more frequency domain vectors indicated by the terminal device from the frequency domain vector set according to the index. If the terminal device uses the index of each frequency domain vector to indicate the selected frequency domain vector, the network device may determine one or more frequency domain vectors indicated by the terminal device from the set of frequency domain vectors according to each index. If the terminal device uses a bitmap to indicate the frequency domain vector, the network device may determine one or more frequency domain vectors indicated by the terminal device according to the correspondence between the bitmap and each frequency domain vector in the frequency domain vector set.
  • the first indication information can also be used to indicate one or more space domain vectors and one or more weighting coefficients.
  • the network device may determine one or more airspace vectors and one or more weighting coefficients according to the first indication information.
  • the method for the network device to determine the airspace vector according to the first indication information corresponds to the method for the terminal device to generate the indication information for the airspace vector.
  • the method by which the network device determines the weighting coefficient according to the first indication information corresponds to the method by which the terminal device generates the indication information of the weighting coefficient. Since the network device determines the space vector and the weighting coefficient according to the first indication information, reference may be made to the prior art. For brevity, the detailed description of the specific process is omitted here.
  • step 240 specifically includes: the network device determining one or more frequency domain vectors according to the first indication information when the frequency domain unit to be reported in the frequency domain unit group meets a preset condition.
  • the network device determines whether the frequency domain unit to be reported in the frequency domain unit group meets the preset condition is similar to the specific process of determining whether the frequency domain unit to be reported in the frequency domain unit group meets the preset condition in step 210 above, For brevity, I will not repeat them here.
  • the preset condition may be pre-agreed by the terminal device and the network device, or pre-defined by the protocol.
  • the network device and the terminal device may determine whether the frequency domain unit to be reported meets the preset condition based on the same preset condition.
  • the method further includes step 250, the network device determines the precoding vectors of one or more frequency domain units in the frequency domain unit group.
  • the network device may determine the precoding vector of one or more frequency domain units in the frequency domain unit group according to the predetermined frequency domain vector, space domain vector and weighting coefficient, for example, as determined in step 240 above.
  • the network device may determine L r space domain vectors, M r frequency domain vectors, and L r ⁇ M r weighting coefficients according to the first indication information. Then, the network device may determine the precoding vector on the rth transmission layer and the jth frequency domain unit in the frequency domain unit group based on the following formula:
  • u l, r represents based on L r a spatial vector r th transport layer feedback in the l th spatial vector
  • v m, r denotes based on the r th transport layer feedback
  • M r frequency-domain vectors m frequency domain vectors
  • v m,r (j) represents the jth element in v m,r
  • a l,m,r represents the weighting coefficients corresponding to the lth space domain vector u l,r and the mth frequency domain vector v m,r based on the r th transmission layer feedback
  • a l,m,r,1 Represents the weighting coefficients corresponding to the lth space domain vector u l and the mth frequency domain vector v m in the first polarization direction based on feedback from the rth transmission layer
  • each weighting coefficient may include an amplitude coefficient and a phase coefficient.
  • E.g, p l,m,r represents the amplitude coefficient, Represents the phase coefficient.
  • the relationship between a l,m,r,1 and a l,m,r,2 and amplitude coefficient and phase coefficient respectively is similar. For brevity, I will not list them one by one here.
  • the number of weighting coefficients fed back by the terminal device based on the rth transmission layer may not necessarily be the sum of L r ⁇ M r , that is, it may not necessarily be combined with the above L r space vectors
  • the L r ⁇ M r space frequency component matrices constructed by the M r frequency domain vectors correspond. However, it may only correspond to a part of the space-frequency component matrixes among the L r ⁇ M r space-frequency component matrixes.
  • the above formula can be further simplified, or the partial unreported weighting coefficient in the above formula can be treated as a weighting coefficient with zero amplitude. Since the method for the network device to restore the precoding vector is an internal implementation behavior of the device, the present application does not limit the specific method for the network device to restore the precoding vector.
  • R transmission layers share one or more space domain vectors and one or more frequency domain vectors, such as L space domain vectors and M frequency domain vectors, the above is used to determine the rth transmission layer and the frequency domain unit group
  • the formula of the precoding vector of the jth frequency domain unit in can be simplified to:
  • u l represents the lth space domain vector among the L space domain vectors
  • v m represents the mth frequency domain vector among the M frequency domain vectors
  • v m (j) represents the jth element in v m
  • the terminal device feeds back one or more frequency domain vectors based on each space domain vector, the above formula for determining the precoding vectors on the rth transmission layer and the jth frequency domain unit in the frequency domain unit group can be deformed for:
  • u l,r represents the lth space domain vector among the L r space domain vectors fed back based on the rth transport layer
  • R represents transmission based on the feedback layer, the first polarization direction and the l-th spatial vectors l and m frequency domain vectors corresponding weighting coefficient
  • R represents transmission based on the feedback layer, the second polarization direction and the l-th spatial vectors l and m frequency domain vectors corresponding weighting coefficient.
  • the terminal equipment separately reports the broadband amplitude coefficient of the space domain vector and the weighting coefficient of the space frequency component matrix, the above is used to determine the precoding vector on the rth transmission layer and the jth frequency domain unit in the frequency domain unit group
  • the formula can also be transformed into:
  • Vector corresponding represents the phase coefficient corresponding to the lth space domain vector and the mth frequency domain vector based on the rth transmission layer feedback;
  • p l,m,r,1 represents the first pole based on the rth transmission layer feedback Amplitude coefficients corresponding to the lth space domain vector and the mth frequency domain vector in the normalization direction;
  • the network device may also construct a space-frequency matrix based on the space-domain vector, frequency-domain vector, and weighting coefficients, such as Furthermore, the precoding vector of each frequency domain unit is determined.
  • the calculation formula of the space frequency matrix shown here only shows the case where R transmission layers share L space domain vectors and M frequency domain vectors, and the above various possible situations can be modified on this basis. For the sake of brevity, I will not list them here.
  • the terminal device determines the length of the frequency domain vector based on the number of frequency domain units included in the bandwidth occupied by the frequency domain unit from the first frequency domain unit to the last frequency domain unit in the frequency domain unit group,
  • the selected frequency domain vector can maintain the continuity of the frequency domain, and can more accurately reflect the changing law of the channel in the frequency domain. Therefore, a higher feedback accuracy can be ensured, so that the precoding vector recovered by the network device based on the feedback of the terminal device can be better adapted to the channel, which is beneficial to improve the subsequent data transmission performance.
  • the selected frequency domain vector does not really simulate the changing law of channels on consecutive frequency domain units, so It cannot accurately reflect the changing law of the channel in the frequency domain, and the feedback accuracy is affected.
  • one or more frequency domain vectors are used to describe the different changes of the channel in the frequency domain, and the linear superposition of the one or more frequency domain vectors is used to simulate the changes of the channel in the frequency domain, and the frequency domain is fully tapped.
  • the relationship between the units utilizes the continuity of the frequency domain, and uses fewer frequency domain vectors to describe the changing law of the channel on multiple frequency domain units.
  • the method for determining the length of the frequency domain vector is not limited to one transmission layer or one polarization direction.
  • the length of the frequency domain vector determined by the terminal device for a group of frequency domain units may be applicable to one or more transmission layers and one or more polarization directions.
  • the terminal device can determine the length of the frequency domain vector only once, and then perform dual domain compression to determine the frequency domain vector to be reported. This application does not limit the number of transmission layers and the number of polarization directions.
  • the feedback method for dual-domain compression can coexist with other feedback methods, and the terminal device can determine which method to use to feed back the precoding vector to the network device based on the number and location of frequency domain units to be reported.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic flowchart of a method 600 for reporting PMI provided by another embodiment of the present application from the perspective of device interaction. As shown, the method 600 may include steps 610 to 630. The steps of method 600 are described in detail below.
  • step 610 the terminal device generates PMI.
  • the frequency domain unit group has been described in detail in the method 200 above, and for the sake of brevity, no further description will be given here.
  • the PMI in the case where the frequency domain unit to be reported in the frequency domain unit group satisfies the preset condition, the PMI includes an indication of one or more frequency domain vectors.
  • the one or more frequency domain vectors are partial frequency domain vectors in the frequency domain vector group.
  • each frequency domain vector in each frequency domain vector group is orthogonal to each other. That is to say, the one or more frequency domain vectors may be one or more frequency domain vectors selected from the frequency domain vector group by frequency domain compression.
  • the PMI does not include the indication of the frequency domain vector, or only includes the indication of the frequency domain vector group.
  • the terminal device may still use the PMI feedback method of the type II codebook to report the space domain vector, broadband amplitude coefficient, and subband superposition coefficient, in this case Next, the indication of the frequency domain vector is not included in the PMI.
  • the terminal device may directly feed back a frequency domain vector group to the network device without using the type II codebook feedback method, so that the network device can Each frequency domain vector in the frequency domain vector group, as well as the space domain vector and weighting coefficients, restore the precoding vector.
  • the PMI may include only the indication of the frequency domain vector group.
  • the terminal device may not feed back the indication of the frequency domain vector group, and the terminal device and the network device may agree in advance to use the frequency domain vector of the first frequency domain vector group in the frequency domain vector set for recovering the precoding vector.
  • the PMI does not include the indication of the frequency domain vector or frequency domain vector group.
  • the terminal device may directly determine the space domain vector and the weighting coefficient based on all frequency domain vectors in the frequency domain vector group, and further based on the dual domain compression. For example, the spatial domain frequency and DFT of the spatial frequency matrix are used to determine the spatial domain vector and the weighting coefficient.
  • the dual-domain compression method of constructing the precoding vectors using part of the frequency domain vectors in the frequency domain vector group is called the first compression method; the entire frequency domain vector group will be used to construct the pre-coding vector
  • the dual-domain compression method of the encoding vector is called the second compression method.
  • the method of feeding back the PMI based on the first compression method is referred to as the PMI feedback method based on the first compression method
  • the method of feeding back the PMI based on the second compression method is referred to as the PMI feedback method based on the second compression method. It can be understood that both the first compression method and the second compression method belong to the dual-domain compression method.
  • the PMI described above includes the indication of the frequency domain vector, but does not mean that the PMI includes only the indication of the frequency domain vector.
  • the PMI may also include the indication of the space domain vector and the indication of the weighting coefficient. The indication of whether the frequency domain vector is included in the PMI described here is just to distinguish the first compression method from the second compression method.
  • the terminal device and the network device may pre-appoint preset conditions.
  • the PMI feedback based on the first compression method is adopted; when the frequency domain unit in the frequency domain unit group does not satisfy the preset condition, it is adopted
  • the PMI feedback method based on the second compression method, or the PMI feedback method using type II codebook is adopted.
  • whether the PMI feedback mode based on the second compression mode or the PMI feedback mode of the type II codebook can be pre-determined by the network device and the terminal device
  • the agreement, or, the agreement is predefined.
  • the network device and the terminal device may perform corresponding steps based on the same feedback method.
  • the preset condition is: the number of frequency domain units to be reported in the frequency domain unit group is greater than or equal to a predefined first threshold.
  • the preset condition is that: the number of frequency domain units to be reported in the frequency domain unit group is greater than or equal to a predefined second threshold, and the Q value is greater than or equal to a predefined third threshold.
  • the preset condition is: the number of frequency domain units to be reported in the frequency domain unit group is greater than or equal to a predefined fourth threshold, and the number of frequency domain units to be reported in the frequency domain unit group is greater than or equal to y ⁇ Q, 0 ⁇ y ⁇ 1, y is a predefined value.
  • the preset condition is that the number of frequency domain units in the frequency domain unit group that does not need to be reported is less than or equal to a predefined fifth threshold, and the Q value is greater than or equal to a predefined sixth threshold.
  • the preset condition is: the number of frequency domain units that do not need to be reported in the frequency domain unit group is less than or equal to a predefined seventh threshold, and the number of frequency domain units that do not need to be reported are less than or equal to z ⁇ Q, 0 ⁇ z ⁇ 1, z is a predefined value.
  • the preset condition is: the number of frequency domain units in the frequency domain unit group that does not need to be reported is less than or equal to a predefined eighth threshold.
  • the length N f of the frequency domain vector can be, for example, from the frequency domain unit group listed above from the first frequency domain unit to be reported to the last frequency to be reported.
  • the number Q of frequency domain units contained in the bandwidth occupied by the domain unit is determined. Since the relationship between N f and Q has been described in detail in the above method 200, for the sake of brevity, no further description will be given here.
  • the length N f of the frequency domain vector is not limited to be determined by the above Q value, for example, the length of the frequency domain vector can also be determined by the number of frequency domain units included in the reported bandwidth, or, by the frequency domain unit group The number of frequency domain units to be reported is determined. This application does not limit this.
  • the length N f of the frequency domain vector may also be the same as the length of the frequency domain vector determined in the first compression mode.
  • the length of the frequency domain vector may be determined by the number Q of frequency domain units contained in the bandwidth occupied by the frequency domain unit from the first frequency domain unit to the last frequency domain unit in the frequency domain unit group.
  • the length of the frequency domain vector may also be determined by the number of frequency domain units to be reported in the frequency domain unit group, or the length of the frequency domain vector may also be determined by the number of frequency domain units included in the reported bandwidth. This application does not limit this.
  • the terminal device can determine the length of the frequency domain vector based on a predefined method.
  • the network device may also determine the frequency domain vector used to recover the precoding vector based on the same method and the feedback of the terminal device.
  • step 620 the terminal device sends PMI. Accordingly, the network device receives the PMI.
  • the terminal device may send the PMI to the network device through physical uplink resources, such as PUSCH or PUCCH, so that the terminal device determines the precoding matrix according to the PMI.
  • physical uplink resources such as PUSCH or PUCCH
  • the specific method for the terminal device to send the PMI to the network device through the physical uplink resource may be the same as that in the prior art. For brevity, a detailed description of the specific process is omitted here.
  • step 630 the network device determines the precoding matrix corresponding to each frequency domain unit according to the PMI and whether the frequency domain unit to be reported in the frequency domain unit group meets the preset condition.
  • the network device may determine which feedback method the terminal device uses to feed back the PMI based on the preset conditions described above, and then parse the information in the PMI according to the feedback method.
  • the network device determines that the frequency domain unit to be reported in the frequency domain unit group meets the preset condition, it may be determined that the terminal device determines the frequency domain vector based on the first compression mode, that is, the PMI feedback mode based on frequency domain compression is used.
  • the network device may restore the precoding vectors of one or more frequency domain units on each transmission layer based on the method listed in step 250 in the above method 200, and then determine the precoding matrix of each frequency domain unit.
  • the network device determines that the frequency domain unit to be reported in the frequency domain unit group does not satisfy the preset condition, it may be determined that the terminal device adopts a type II codebook PMI feedback method, or a frequency domain transform-based PMI feedback method.
  • the network device can determine the precoding matrix of each frequency domain unit based on the existing technology. For specific implementation, refer to the feedback mode defined in the type II port selection codebook defined in the NR protocol TS38.214 version 15 (release 15, R15). For brevity, I will not repeat them here.
  • the network device may determine the precoding matrix of each frequency domain unit based on the two-domain compression method according to the predefined frequency domain vector group or the frequency domain vector group fed back by the terminal device.
  • the specific implementation manner has been described in detail in step 250 of the above method 200, and for the sake of brevity, no more details will be given here.
  • embodiments of the present application introduce multiple feedback modes, and select an appropriate feedback mode to report PMI according to the number and position of frequency domain units to be reported. Fully considered the number of frequency domain units to be reported and the continuity of distribution. By introducing multiple feedback modes to adapt to different situations, you can take into account both feedback accuracy and feedback overhead, so as to achieve a balance between the two.
  • the size of the sequence number of each process does not mean the order of execution, and the execution order of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not constitute any limitation on the implementation process of the embodiments of the present application .
  • the communication device 1000 may include a communication unit 1100 and a processing unit 1200.
  • the communication device 1000 may correspond to the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment, for example, it may be a terminal device, or a chip configured in the terminal device.
  • the communication device 1000 may correspond to the terminal device in the method 200 or the method 600 according to an embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 1000 may include a terminal for performing the method 200 in FIG. 2 or the method 600 in FIG. 6 A unit of method performed by a device.
  • each unit in the communication device 1000 and the other operations and/or functions described above are to implement the corresponding processes of the method 200 in FIG. 2 or the method 600 in FIG. 6, respectively.
  • the communication unit 1100 can be used to perform steps 220 and 230 in the method 200
  • the processing unit 1200 can be used to perform step 210 in the method 200. It should be understood that the specific process for each unit to execute the above corresponding steps has been described in detail in the above method embodiments, and for the sake of brevity, no further description is provided here.
  • the communication unit 1100 may be used to perform step 620 in the method 600 and the processing unit 1200 may be used to perform step 610 in the method 600. It should be understood that the specific process for each unit to execute the above corresponding steps has been described in detail in the above method embodiments, and for the sake of brevity, no further description is provided here.
  • the communication unit 1100 in the communication device 1000 may correspond to the transceiver 2020 in the terminal device 2000 shown in FIG. 8, and the processing unit 1200 in the communication device 1000 may It corresponds to the processor 2010 in the terminal device 2000 shown in FIG. 8.
  • the communication unit 1100 in the communication device 1000 may be an input/output interface.
  • the communication device 1000 may correspond to the network device in the foregoing method embodiment, for example, it may be a network device, or a chip configured in the network device.
  • the communication device 1000 may correspond to the network device in the method 200 or the method 600 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 1000 may include the method 200 in FIG. 2 or the method 600 in FIG. 6.
  • each unit in the communication device 1000 and the other operations and/or functions described above are to implement the corresponding processes of the method 200 in FIG. 2 or the method 600 in FIG. 6, respectively.
  • the communication unit 1100 can be used to perform steps 220 and 230 in the method 200
  • the processing unit 1200 can be used to perform steps 240 and 250 in the method 200. It should be understood that the specific process for each unit to execute the above corresponding steps has been described in detail in the above method embodiments, and for the sake of brevity, no further description is provided here.
  • the communication unit 1100 may be used to perform step 620 in the method 600 and the processing unit 1200 may be used to perform step 630 in the method 600. It should be understood that the specific process for each unit to execute the above corresponding steps has been described in detail in the above method embodiments, and for the sake of brevity, no further description is provided here.
  • the communication unit in the communication device 1000 may correspond to the transceiver 3200 in the network device 3000 shown in FIG. 9, and the processing unit 1200 in the communication device 1000 may It corresponds to the processor 3100 in the network device 3000 shown in FIG. 9.
  • the communication unit 1100 in the communication device 1000 may be an input/output interface.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device 2000 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal device 2000 can be applied to the system shown in FIG. 1 to perform the functions of the terminal device in the above method embodiments.
  • the terminal device 2000 includes a processor 2010 and a transceiver 2020.
  • the terminal device 2000 further includes a memory 2030.
  • the processor 2010, the transceiver 2002 and the memory 2030 can communicate with each other through an internal connection channel to transfer control and/or data signals.
  • the memory 2030 is used to store a computer program, and the processor 2010 is used from the memory 2030 Call and run the computer program to control the transceiver 2020 to send and receive signals.
  • the terminal device 2000 may further include an antenna 2040 for sending uplink data or uplink control signaling output by the transceiver 2020 through a wireless signal.
  • the processor 2010 and the memory 2030 may be combined into a processing device.
  • the processor 2010 is used to execute the program code stored in the memory 2030 to implement the above functions.
  • the memory 2030 may also be integrated in the processor 2010 or independent of the processor 2010.
  • the processor 2010 may correspond to the processing unit in FIG. 7.
  • the above-mentioned transceiver 2020 may correspond to the communication unit in FIG. 7, and may also be referred to as a transceiver unit.
  • the transceiver 2020 may include a receiver (or receiver, receiving circuit) and a transmitter (or transmitter, transmitting circuit). Among them, the receiver is used to receive signals, and the transmitter is used to transmit signals.
  • the terminal device 2000 shown in FIG. 8 can implement various processes involving the terminal device in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 2 or FIG. 6.
  • the operations and/or functions of each module in the terminal device 2000 are respectively to implement the corresponding processes in the above method embodiments.
  • the above-mentioned processor 2010 may be used to perform the actions described in the foregoing method embodiments that are internally implemented by the terminal device, and the transceiver 2020 may be used to perform the operations described in the foregoing method embodiments by the terminal device to or from the network device. action.
  • the transceiver 2020 may be used to perform the operations described in the foregoing method embodiments by the terminal device to or from the network device. action.
  • the terminal device 2000 may further include a power supply 2050, which is used to provide power to various devices or circuits in the terminal device.
  • a power supply 2050 which is used to provide power to various devices or circuits in the terminal device.
  • the terminal device 2000 may further include one or more of an input unit 2060, a display unit 2070, an audio circuit 2080, a camera 2090, a sensor 2100, etc.
  • the audio circuit It may also include a speaker 2082, a microphone 2084, and so on.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present application, for example, may be a schematic structural diagram of a base station.
  • the base station 3000 can be applied to the system shown in FIG. 1 to perform the functions of the network device in the above method embodiments.
  • the base station 3000 may include one or more radio frequency units, such as a remote radio unit (RRU) 3100 and one or more baseband units (BBU) (also called a distributed unit (DU) )) 3200.
  • RRU 3100 may be called a transceiver unit, corresponding to the communication unit 1200 in FIG. 7.
  • the transceiver unit 3100 may also be called a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, etc., which may include at least one antenna 3101 and a radio frequency unit 3102.
  • the transceiving unit 3100 may include a receiving unit and a transmitting unit, the receiving unit may correspond to a receiver (or receiver, receiving circuit), and the transmitting unit may correspond to a transmitter (or transmitter, transmitting circuit).
  • the RRU 3100 part is mainly used for the transmission and reception of radio frequency signals and the conversion of radio frequency signals and baseband signals, for example, for sending instruction information to terminal devices.
  • the 3200 part of the BBU is mainly used for baseband processing and controlling the base station.
  • the RRU 3100 and the BBU 3200 may be physically arranged together, or may be physically separated, that is, distributed base stations.
  • the BBU 3200 is the control center of the base station, and may also be referred to as a processing unit, which may correspond to the processing unit 1100 in FIG. 7 and is mainly used to complete baseband processing functions, such as channel coding, multiplexing, modulation, spread spectrum, and so on.
  • the BBU processing unit
  • the BBU may be used to control the base station to perform the operation flow on the network device in the above method embodiment, for example, to generate the above indication information.
  • the BBU 3200 may be composed of one or more boards, and multiple boards may jointly support a wireless access network (such as an LTE network) of a single access standard, or may support different access standards respectively. Wireless access network (such as LTE network, 5G network or other networks).
  • the BBU 3200 also includes a memory 3201 and a processor 3202.
  • the memory 3201 is used to store necessary instructions and data.
  • the processor 3202 is used to control the base station to perform necessary actions, for example, to control the base station to execute the operation flow of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the memory 3201 and the processor 3202 may serve one or more single boards. In other words, the memory and the processor can be set separately on each board. It is also possible that multiple boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, each board can also be provided with necessary circuits.
  • the base station 3000 shown in FIG. 9 can implement various processes involving the network device in the method embodiment of FIG. 2 or FIG. 6.
  • the operations and/or functions of each module in the base station 3000 are to implement the corresponding processes in the above method embodiments.
  • the above-mentioned BBU 3200 can be used to perform the actions described in the foregoing method embodiments that are implemented internally by the network device, and the RRU 3100 can be used to perform the actions described in the previous method embodiments that the network device sends to or receives from the terminal device.
  • the RRU 3100 can be used to perform the actions described in the previous method embodiments that the network device sends to or receives from the terminal device.
  • An embodiment of the present application further provides a processing device, including a processor and an interface; the processor is used to execute the vector indication method for constructing a precoding vector in any of the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the above processing device may be one or more chips.
  • the processing device may be a field programmable gate array (field programmable gate array (FPGA)), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or a system chip (SoC), or It is a central processor (CPU), it can also be a network processor (NP), it can also be a digital signal processing circuit (digital signal processor, DSP), or a microcontroller (micro controller) , MCU), can also be a programmable controller (programmable logic device, PLD) or other integrated chips.
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • SoC system chip
  • CPU central processor
  • NP network processor
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • microcontroller micro controller
  • MCU microcontroller
  • PLD programmable logic device
  • each step of the above method may be completed by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in the processor or instructions in the form of software.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in conjunction with the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied and executed by a hardware processor, or may be executed and completed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor.
  • the software module may be located in a mature storage medium in the art, such as a random access memory, a flash memory, a read-only memory, a programmable read-only memory, an electrically erasable programmable memory, and a register.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware. In order to avoid repetition, they are not described in detail here.
  • the processor in the embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capabilities.
  • the steps of the foregoing method embodiments may be completed by instructions in the form of hardware integrated logic circuits or software in the processor.
  • the aforementioned processor may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components .
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • the methods, steps, and logical block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application may be implemented or executed.
  • the general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may be any conventional processor or the like.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in conjunction with the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied and executed by a hardware decoding processor, or may be executed and completed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor.
  • the software module may be located in a mature storage medium in the art, such as a random access memory, a flash memory, a read-only memory, a programmable read-only memory, an electrically erasable programmable memory, and a register.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
  • the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be volatile memory or non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
  • the non-volatile memory may be read-only memory (read-only memory, ROM), programmable read-only memory (programmable ROM, PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), electronically Erasable programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • Volatile memory can be random access memory (random access memory, RAM), which acts as an external cache.
  • RAM random access memory
  • SRAM static random access memory
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • DRAM synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • SDRAM synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory double data SDRAM, DDR SDRAM
  • enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM
  • serial link DRAM SLDRAM
  • direct RAMbus RAM direct RAMbus RAM
  • the present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes: computer program code, when the computer program code runs on the computer, the computer is caused to perform the operations shown in FIGS. 2 and 6 The method of any one of the embodiments is shown.
  • the present application also provides a computer-readable medium, the computer-readable medium stores program code, and when the program code is run on the computer, the computer is caused to execute the operations shown in FIGS. 2 and 6. The method of any one of the embodiments is shown.
  • the present application further provides a system, which includes the foregoing one or more terminal devices and one or more network devices.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, all or part of the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are generated.
  • the computer may be a general-purpose computer, a dedicated computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be from a website site, computer, server or data center Transmission to another website, computer, server or data center via wired (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.).
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device including one or more available medium integrated servers, data centers, and the like.
  • the usable medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a high-density digital video disc (DVD)), or a semiconductor medium (for example, a solid state disc, SSD)) etc.
  • a magnetic medium for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape
  • an optical medium for example, a high-density digital video disc (DVD)
  • DVD high-density digital video disc
  • SSD solid state disc
  • the network device in each of the above device embodiments corresponds exactly to the network device or terminal device in the terminal device and method embodiments, and the corresponding steps are performed by the corresponding modules or units, for example, the communication unit (transceiver) performs the receiving or The steps of sending, other than sending and receiving, can be executed by the processing unit (processor).
  • the function of the specific unit can refer to the corresponding method embodiment. There may be one or more processors.
  • a component may be, but is not limited to, a process running on a processor, a processor, an object, an executable file, an execution thread, a program, and/or a computer.
  • the application running on the computing device and the computing device can be components.
  • One or more components can reside in a process and/or thread of execution, and a component can be localized on one computer and/or distributed between 2 or more computers.
  • these components can execute from various computer readable media having various data structures stored thereon.
  • the component may, for example, be based on a signal having one or more data packets (eg, data from two components that interact with another component between a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet that interacts with other systems through signals) Communicate through local and/or remote processes.
  • data packets eg, data from two components that interact with another component between a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet that interacts with other systems through signals
  • the disclosed system, device, and method may be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are only schematic.
  • the division of the unit is only a logical function division, and there may be other divisions in actual implementation, for example, multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored, or not implemented.
  • the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical, or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place or may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • each functional unit may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof.
  • software When implemented using software, it can be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions (programs). When the computer program instructions (programs) are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions according to the embodiments of the present application are generated in whole or in part.
  • the computer may be a general-purpose computer, a dedicated computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be from a website site, computer, server or data center Transmission to another website, computer, server or data center via wired (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.).
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device including one or more available medium integrated servers, data centers, and the like.
  • the usable medium may be a magnetic medium (eg, floppy disk, hard disk, magnetic tape), optical medium (eg, DVD), or semiconductor medium (eg, solid state disk (SSD)), or the like.
  • the function is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present application essentially or part of the contribution to the existing technology or part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product
  • the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to enable a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to perform all or part of the steps of the methods described in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the foregoing storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program codes .

Abstract

The present application provides a vector indication method for constructing a precoding vector, and a communication apparatus. The method comprises: a terminal device generates and sends first indication information, the first indication information being used for indicating one or more frequency domain vectors, the one or more frequency domain vectors being used for constructing precoding vector(s) corresponding to one or more frequency domain units in a frequency domain unit group, and the length of the frequency domain vector(s) being determined by the number of frequency domain units comprised in a bandwidth occupied from the first frequency domain unit to be reported to the last frequency domain unit to be reported in the frequency domain unit group, wherein the frequency domain unit group comprises one or more frequency domain units, and the bandwidth occupied by the frequency domain unit group is part or all of a reported bandwidth. The length of the frequency domain vector(s) is determined on the basis of the method, so that the selected frequency domain vector can maintain continuity of a frequency domain, and accurately reflect the changing law of a channel in the frequency domain, thereby helping obtain high feedback precision.

Description

用于构建预编码向量的向量指示方法和通信装置Vector indicating method and communication device for constructing precoding vector
本申请要求于2019年1月11日提交中国专利局、申请号为201910028291.8、申请名称为“用于构建预编码向量的向量指示方法和通信装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application requires the priority of the Chinese patent application submitted to the Chinese Patent Office on January 11, 2019, with the application number of 201910028291.8 and the application name of "Vector Instruction Method and Communication Device for Constructing Precoding Vectors", all of which are approved by The reference is incorporated in this application.
技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及通信领域,并且更具体地,涉及用于构建预编码向量的向量指示方法和通信装置。The present application relates to the field of communication, and more specifically, to a vector indication method and communication device for constructing a precoding vector.
背景技术Background technique
在大规模多输入多输出(massive multiple-input multiple output,Massive MIMO)技术中,网络设备可以通过预编码技术减小多用户之间的干扰以及同一用户的多个信号流之间的干扰。从而提高信号质量,实现空分复用,提高频谱利用率。In massive multiple-input multiple-output (Massive MIMO) technology, network equipment can reduce interference between multiple users and interference between multiple signal streams of the same user through precoding technology. Thereby improving signal quality, realizing space division multiplexing and improving spectrum utilization.
终端设备例如可以通过信道测量等方式确定预编码向量,并希望通过反馈,使得网络设备获得与终端设备确定的预编码向量相同或者相近的预编码向量。为降低反馈开销,提高反馈精度,在一种实现方式中,终端设备可以通过空域压缩和频域压缩结合的反馈方式来向网络设备指示预编码向量。具体地,终端设备可以基于每个传输层上各频域单元的预编码向量,选择一个或多个空域向量和一个或多个频域向量,以通过空域向量和频域向量所构建的矩阵的加权和来拟合与各传输层上各频域单元对应的预编码向量。The terminal device may determine the precoding vector by way of channel measurement, for example, and hope that through feedback, the network device obtains a precoding vector that is the same as or similar to the precoding vector determined by the terminal device. In order to reduce feedback overhead and improve feedback accuracy, in one implementation, the terminal device may indicate the precoding vector to the network device through a feedback method combining space domain compression and frequency domain compression. Specifically, the terminal device may select one or more space domain vectors and one or more frequency domain vectors based on the precoding vectors of each frequency domain unit on each transmission layer, so that the matrix of the matrix constructed by the space domain vectors and frequency domain vectors The weighted sum is used to fit the precoding vector corresponding to each frequency domain unit on each transmission layer.
然而,这种实现方式中对频域向量的长度的定义尚未明确。However, the definition of the length of the frequency domain vector in this implementation is not clear.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请提供一种用于构建预编码向量的向量指示方法和通信装置,以期明确频域向量的长度,进而确定用于构建预编码向量的频域向量。The present application provides a vector indication method and a communication device for constructing a precoding vector, in order to clarify the length of the frequency domain vector, and then determine the frequency domain vector for constructing the precoding vector.
第一方面,提供了一种用于构建预编码向量的向量指示方法,该方法可以由终端设备执行,或者,也可以由配置于终端设备中的芯片执行。In the first aspect, a vector indication method for constructing a precoding vector is provided. The method may be executed by a terminal device, or may be executed by a chip configured in the terminal device.
具体地,该方法包括:生成第一指示信息,该第一指示信息用于指示一个或多个频域向量,该一个或多个频域向量用于构建一频域单元组中的一个或多个频域单元对应的预编码向量,该频域向量的长度N f由该频域单元组中从首个待上报的频域单元至末个待上报频域单元所占的带宽中包含的频域单元的数量Q确定,其中,该频域单元组包括一个或多个频域单元,且该频域单元组所占的带宽为上报带宽的频域占用带宽的部分或全部带宽;N f和Q均为正整数;发送该第一指示信息。 Specifically, the method includes: generating first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate one or more frequency domain vectors, and the one or more frequency domain vectors are used to construct one or more frequency domain unit groups The precoding vector corresponding to each frequency domain unit, the length of the frequency domain vector N f is from the frequency domain unit in the frequency domain unit from the first frequency domain unit to be reported to the last frequency domain unit The number Q of domain units is determined, where the frequency domain unit group includes one or more frequency domain units, and the bandwidth occupied by the frequency domain unit group is part or all of the bandwidth occupied by the frequency domain of the reported bandwidth; N f and Q are all positive integers; send the first indication information.
在本申请实施例中,终端设备基于频域单元组中从首个待上报的频域单元至末个待上报的频域单元所占带宽中包含的频域单元的数量确定频域向量的长度,可以使得所选择的频域向量能够保持频域的连续性,更能够准确地反映信道在频域的变化规律。因此有利于 获得较高的反馈精度,使得网络设备基于终端设备的反馈所恢复的预编码向量能够更好地与信道适配,进而有利于提高后续的数据传输性能。与之相对地,若仅仅根据待上报的频域单元的数量来确定频域向量的长度,所选择的频域向量并未真正地模拟连续的多个频域单元上信道的变化规律,因此并不能够准确反映信道在频域的变化规律,反馈精度受到影响,后续的数据传输性能也就可能会受到影响。In the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device determines the length of the frequency domain vector based on the number of frequency domain units contained in the bandwidth occupied by the frequency domain unit from the first frequency domain unit to the last frequency domain unit in the frequency domain unit group , Can make the selected frequency domain vector can maintain the continuity of the frequency domain, and can more accurately reflect the changing law of the channel in the frequency domain. Therefore, it is beneficial to obtain higher feedback accuracy, so that the precoding vector recovered by the network device based on the feedback of the terminal device can be better adapted to the channel, which is further beneficial to improve the subsequent data transmission performance. On the contrary, if the length of the frequency domain vector is determined only according to the number of frequency domain units to be reported, the selected frequency domain vector does not really simulate the changing law of channels on consecutive frequency domain units, so It cannot accurately reflect the changing law of the channel in the frequency domain, the feedback accuracy is affected, and the subsequent data transmission performance may also be affected.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述生成第一指示信息,包括:在该频域单元组中待上报的频域单元满足预设条件的情况下,生成该第一指示信息。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementation manners of the first aspect, the generating the first indication information includes: generating the first if the frequency domain unit to be reported in the frequency domain unit group meets a preset condition One instruction.
也就是说,终端设备可以根据待上报的频域单元来确定是否采用本申请实施例提供的方法来反馈用于构建预编码向量的信息。例如,当待上报的频域单元较连续地分布在频域资源中时,可以采用本申请实施例提供的方法来反馈用于构建预编码向量的信息;又例如,当待上报的频域单元个数较多时,可以采用本申请实施例提供的方法来反馈用于构建预编码向量的信息。That is, the terminal device may determine whether to use the method provided in the embodiment of the present application to feed back information for constructing the precoding vector according to the frequency domain unit to be reported. For example, when the frequency domain units to be reported are more continuously distributed in frequency domain resources, the method provided in the embodiment of the present application may be used to feed back the information used to construct the precoding vector; for example, when the frequency domain units to be reported When the number is large, the method provided in the embodiment of the present application may be used to feed back the information used to construct the precoding vector.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,该方法还包括:接收第二指示信息,该第二指示信息用于指示待上报的频域单元的个数和位置。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementation manners of the first aspect, the method further includes: receiving second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate the number and location of frequency domain units to be reported.
网络设备可以通过第二指示信息向终端设备指示待上报的频域单元的个数和位置,以便于终端设备根据待上报的频域单元的个数和/或位置,确定是否采用本申请实施例提供的方法来反馈用于构建预编码向量的信息,并可进一步确定用于频域压缩的频域向量的长度。The network device may indicate the number and location of frequency domain units to be reported to the terminal device through the second indication information, so that the terminal device determines whether to use the embodiment of the present application according to the number and/or location of frequency domain units to be reported A method is provided to feed back the information used to construct the precoding vector, and the length of the frequency domain vector used for frequency domain compression can be further determined.
该第二指示信息例如可以是信道状态信息(channel state information,CSI)上报配置(CSI-ReportConfig)中的上报带宽(csi-ReportingBand)。该csi-ReportingBand通过位图指示了待上报的子带的个数和位置。当本申请实施例中所述的待上报的频域单元与子带的粒度不同时,可以基于预先确定的频域单元与子带的粒度关系,确定待上报的频域单元的个数和位置。因此,该csi-ReportingBand可以间接地指示待上报的频域单元的个数和位置。The second indication information may be, for example, the reporting bandwidth (csi-ReportingBand) in the channel state information (channel) state information (CSI) reporting configuration (CSI-ReportConfig). The csi-ReportingBand indicates the number and position of subbands to be reported through a bitmap. When the granularity of the frequency domain unit to be reported and the subband described in the embodiments of the present application are different, the number and position of the frequency domain unit to be reported may be determined based on the predetermined granularity relationship between the frequency domain unit and the subband . Therefore, the csi-ReportingBand can indirectly indicate the number and location of frequency domain units to be reported.
应理解,csi-ReportingBand仅为第二指示信息的一例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。本申请并不排除通过其他已有信令或新增信令来指示待上报的频域单元的个数和位置。It should be understood that csi-ReportingBand is only an example of the second indication information, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. This application does not exclude other existing signaling or newly added signaling to indicate the number and location of frequency domain units to be reported.
第二方面,提供了一种用于构建预编码向量的向量指示方法,该方法可以由网络设备执行,或者,也可以由配置于网络设备中的芯片执行。In a second aspect, a vector indication method for constructing a precoding vector is provided. The method may be executed by a network device, or may be executed by a chip configured in the network device.
具体地,该方法包括:接收第一指示信息,该第一指示信息用于指示一个或多个频域向量,该一个或多个频域向量用于构建一频域单元组中的一个或多个频域单元对应的预编码向量,该频域向量的长度N f由该频域单元组中从首个待上报的频域单元至末个待上报频域单元所占的带宽中包含的频域单元的数量Q确定,其中,该频域单元组包括一个或多个频域单元,且该频域单元组所占的带宽为上报带宽的频域占用带宽的部分或全部带宽;N f和Q均为正整数;根据该第一指示信息确定一个或多个频域向量。 Specifically, the method includes: receiving first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate one or more frequency domain vectors, and the one or more frequency domain vectors are used to construct one or more frequency domain unit groups The precoding vector corresponding to each frequency domain unit, the length of the frequency domain vector N f is from the frequency domain unit in the frequency domain unit from the first frequency domain unit to be reported to the last frequency domain unit The number Q of domain units is determined, where the frequency domain unit group includes one or more frequency domain units, and the bandwidth occupied by the frequency domain unit group is part or all of the bandwidth occupied by the frequency domain of the reported bandwidth; N f and Q are all positive integers; one or more frequency domain vectors are determined according to the first indication information.
在本申请实施例中,基于频域单元组中从首个待上报的频域单元至末个待上报的频域单元所占带宽中包含的频域单元的数量确定频域向量的长度,可以使得所选择的频域向量能够保持频域的连续性,更能够准确地反映信道在频域的变化规律。因此有利于获得较高的反馈精度,使得网络设备基于终端设备的反馈所恢复的预编码向量能够更好地与信道适配,进而有利于提高后续的数据传输性能。与之相对地,若仅仅根据待上报的频域单元的数量来确定频域向量的长度,所选择的频域向量并未真正地模拟连续的多个频域单元上信 道的变化规律,因此并不能够准确反映信道在频域的变化规律,反馈精度受到影响,后续的数据传输性能也就可能会受到影响。In the embodiment of the present application, the length of the frequency domain vector is determined based on the number of frequency domain units included in the bandwidth occupied by the frequency domain unit from the first frequency domain unit to the last frequency domain unit in the frequency domain unit group. The selected frequency domain vector can maintain the continuity of the frequency domain, and can more accurately reflect the changing law of the channel in the frequency domain. Therefore, it is beneficial to obtain a higher feedback accuracy, so that the precoding vector recovered by the network device based on the feedback of the terminal device can be better adapted to the channel, which is further beneficial to improve the subsequent data transmission performance. On the contrary, if the length of the frequency domain vector is determined only according to the number of frequency domain units to be reported, the selected frequency domain vector does not really simulate the changing law of channels on consecutive frequency domain units, so It cannot accurately reflect the changing law of the channel in the frequency domain, the feedback accuracy is affected, and the subsequent data transmission performance may also be affected.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述根据该第一指示信息确定该一个或多个频域向量,包括:在该频域单元组中待上报的频域单元满足预设条件的情况下,根据该第一指示信息确定一个或多个频域向量。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementation manners of the second aspect, the determining the one or more frequency domain vectors according to the first indication information includes: the frequency domain unit to be reported in the frequency domain unit group meets In the case of preset conditions, one or more frequency domain vectors are determined according to the first indication information.
也就是说,终端设备可以根据待上报的频域单元来确定是否采用本申请实施例提供的方法来确定频域向量的长度,并基于双域压缩的方法反馈预编码向量。例如,当待上报的频域单元较连续地分布在频域资源中时,可以采用本申请实施例提供的方法来确定频域向量的长度,并基于双域压缩的方法反馈预编码向量;又例如,当待上报的频域单元个数较多时,可以采用本申请实施例提供的方法来确定频域向量的长度,并基于双域压缩的方法反馈预编码向量。In other words, the terminal device may determine whether to use the method provided in the embodiment of the present application to determine the length of the frequency domain vector according to the frequency domain unit to be reported, and feed back the precoding vector based on the dual domain compression method. For example, when the frequency domain units to be reported are more continuously distributed in frequency domain resources, the method provided in the embodiment of the present application may be used to determine the length of the frequency domain vector, and the precoding vector is fed back based on the method of dual domain compression; and For example, when the number of frequency domain units to be reported is large, the method provided in the embodiment of the present application may be used to determine the length of the frequency domain vector, and the precoding vector is fed back based on the dual domain compression method.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,该方法还包括:发送第二指示信息,该第二指示信息用于指示待上报的频域单元的个数和位置。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementation manners of the second aspect, the method further includes: sending second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate the number and location of frequency domain units to be reported.
网络设备可以通过第二指示信息向终端设备指示待上报的频域单元的个数和位置,以便于终端设备根据待上报的频域单元的个数和/或位置,确定是否采用本申请实施例提供的方法来确定频域向量的长度,并基于双域压缩的方法反馈预编码向量,并可进一步确定用于频域压缩的频域向量的长度。The network device may indicate the number and location of frequency domain units to be reported to the terminal device through the second indication information, so that the terminal device determines whether to use the embodiment of the present application according to the number and/or location of frequency domain units to be reported The provided method determines the length of the frequency domain vector, and feeds back the precoding vector based on the dual-domain compression method, and can further determine the length of the frequency domain vector for frequency domain compression.
该第二指示信息例如可以是信道状态信息(channel state information,CSI)上报配置(CSI-ReportConfig)中的上报带宽(csi-ReportingBand)。该csi-ReportingBand通过位图指示了待上报的子带的个数和位置。当本申请实施例中所述的待上报的频域单元与子带的粒度不同时,可以基于预先确定的频域单元与子带的粒度关系,确定待上报的频域单元的个数和位置。因此,该csi-ReportingBand可以间接地指示待上报的频域单元的个数和位置。The second indication information may be, for example, the reporting bandwidth (csi-ReportingBand) in the channel state information (channel) state information (CSI) reporting configuration (CSI-ReportConfig). The csi-ReportingBand indicates the number and position of subbands to be reported through a bitmap. When the granularity of the frequency domain unit to be reported and the subband described in the embodiments of the present application are different, the number and position of the frequency domain unit to be reported may be determined based on the predetermined granularity relationship between the frequency domain unit and the subband . Therefore, the csi-ReportingBand can indirectly indicate the number and location of frequency domain units to be reported.
应理解,csi-ReportingBand仅为第二指示信息的一例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。本申请并不排除通过其他已有信令或新增信令来指示待上报的频域单元的个数和位置。It should be understood that csi-ReportingBand is only an example of the second indication information, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. This application does not exclude other existing signaling or newly added signaling to indicate the number and location of frequency domain units to be reported.
结合第一方面或第二方面,在某些实现方式中,所述预设条件包括:所述频域单元组中待上报的频域单元的数量大于或等于x×Q,x为预定义值,0<x≤1。With reference to the first aspect or the second aspect, in some implementations, the preset condition includes: the number of frequency domain units to be reported in the frequency domain unit group is greater than or equal to x×Q, where x is a predefined value , 0<x≤1.
即,当频域单元组中待上报的频域单元数在频域单元组中所占的比例较大时,可以采用本申请实施例提供的方法确定频域向量的长度,并基于双域压缩的方法来反馈预编码向量。That is, when the number of frequency domain units to be reported in the frequency domain unit group occupies a large proportion in the frequency domain unit group, the method provided in the embodiment of the present application may be used to determine the length of the frequency domain vector and based on dual domain compression Method to feed back precoding vectors.
可选地,x为0.5。Optionally, x is 0.5.
应理解,x为0.5仅为本申请提供的x的一种可能的取值,不应对本申请构成任何限定。It should be understood that x of 0.5 is only one possible value of x provided in this application, and should not constitute any limitation to this application.
结合第一方面或第二方面,在某些实现方式中,N f=Q。 With reference to the first aspect or the second aspect, in some implementations, N f =Q.
频域向量集合中可以预先定义不同长度的频域向量的集合。当终端设备确定了Q值,可以直接从频域向量集合中选择具有长度与Q值相等的频域向量。基于该方法确定的频域向量的长度使得所选择的频域向量保持频域的连续性,从而有利于获得较高的反馈精度。A set of frequency domain vectors of different lengths can be predefined in the frequency domain vector set. When the terminal device determines the Q value, it can directly select a frequency domain vector with a length equal to the Q value from the set of frequency domain vectors. The length of the frequency domain vector determined based on this method makes the selected frequency domain vector maintain the continuity of the frequency domain, which is beneficial to obtain higher feedback accuracy.
结合第一方面或第二方面,在某些实现方式中,N f>Q。 With reference to the first aspect or the second aspect, in some implementations, N f >Q.
频域向量集合中也可以仅定义一些特定长度的频域向量的集合。当终端设备确定了Q值,便可以从频域向量集合中选择长度大于Q值的频域向量。基于该方法确定的频域向量 的长度使得所选择的频域向量保持频域的连续性,从而有利于获得较高的反馈精度。In the frequency domain vector set, only a set of frequency domain vectors of a certain length may be defined. When the terminal device determines the Q value, it can select a frequency domain vector with a length greater than the Q value from the set of frequency domain vectors. The length of the frequency domain vector determined based on this method enables the selected frequency domain vector to maintain the continuity of the frequency domain, which is beneficial to obtain higher feedback accuracy.
第三方面,提供了一种上报预编码矩阵指示(precoding matrix indicator,PMI)的方法,该方法可以由终端设备执行,或者,也可以由配置于终端设备中的芯片执行。In the third aspect, a method for reporting a precoding matrix indicator (precoding matrix indicator (PMI)) is provided. The method may be executed by a terminal device, or may be executed by a chip configured in the terminal device.
具体地,该方法包括:生成PMI;其中,在频域单元组中待上报的频域单元满足预设条件的情况下,该PMI包括一个或多个频域向量的指示,该一个或多个频域向量为频域向量组中的部分频域向量,该频域向量组包括多个频域向量,且该多个频域向量之间两两相互正交;在该频域单元组中待上报的频域单元不满足该预设条件的情况下,该PMI不包括频域向量的指示;其中,该频域单元组包括一个或多个频域单元,且该频域单元组所占的带宽为上报带宽的频域占用带宽中的部分或全部带宽;发送该PMI。Specifically, the method includes: generating a PMI; where the frequency domain unit to be reported in the frequency domain unit group satisfies a preset condition, the PMI includes an indication of one or more frequency domain vectors, and the one or more The frequency domain vector is a part of the frequency domain vector in the frequency domain vector group. The frequency domain vector group includes a plurality of frequency domain vectors, and the plurality of frequency domain vectors are mutually orthogonal to each other; in the frequency domain unit group When the reported frequency domain unit does not satisfy the preset condition, the PMI does not include an indication of the frequency domain vector; wherein, the frequency domain unit group includes one or more frequency domain units, and the frequency domain unit group occupies The bandwidth is the frequency domain where the reported bandwidth occupies part or all of the bandwidth; the PMI is sent.
第四方面,提供了一种上报PMI的方法,该方法可以由网络设备执行或者,也可以由配置于网络设备中的芯片执行。In a fourth aspect, a method for reporting PMI is provided. The method may be performed by a network device or may be performed by a chip configured in the network device.
具体地,该方法包括:接收PMI;其中,在频域单元组中待上报的频域单元满足预设条件的情况下,该PMI包括一个或多个频域向量的指示,该一个或多个频域向量为频域向量组中的部分频域向量,该频域向量组包括多个频域向量且该多个频域向量之间两两相互正交;在该频域单元组中待上报的频域单元不满足该预设条件的情况下,该PMI不包括频域向量的指示;其中,该频域单元组包括一个或多个频域单元,且该频域单元组所占的带宽为上报带宽的频域占用带宽中的部分或全部带宽;根据该PMI以及该频域单元组中待上报的频域单元是否满足该预设条件,确定各频域单元对应的预编码矩阵。Specifically, the method includes: receiving a PMI; where the frequency domain unit to be reported in the frequency domain unit group satisfies a preset condition, the PMI includes an indication of one or more frequency domain vectors, and the one or more The frequency domain vector is a part of the frequency domain vector in the frequency domain vector group. The frequency domain vector group includes a plurality of frequency domain vectors and the two frequency domain vectors are mutually orthogonal to each other; to be reported in the frequency domain unit group If the frequency domain unit does not satisfy the preset condition, the PMI does not include an indication of the frequency domain vector; wherein, the frequency domain unit group includes one or more frequency domain units, and the bandwidth occupied by the frequency domain unit group To occupy part or all of the bandwidth in the frequency domain for reporting bandwidth; according to the PMI and whether the frequency domain unit to be reported in the frequency domain unit group satisfies the preset condition, determine the precoding matrix corresponding to each frequency domain unit.
在本申请实施例中,为便于区分和说明,将从频域向量组中选择部分频域向量上报以构建预编码向量的方式称为第一压缩方式;将整个频域向量组用于构建预编码向量的方式称为基于频域变换的第二压缩方式。In the embodiment of the present application, for the convenience of distinction and description, a method of selecting a part of frequency domain vectors from the frequency domain vector group and reporting to construct a precoding vector is called a first compression method; the entire frequency domain vector group is used to construct a precoding method. The method of encoding vectors is called a second compression method based on frequency domain transformation.
为了在同等开销下获得较高的反馈精度,终端设备可以根据待上报的频域单元的个数和/或位置确定合理的反馈方式。在包括类型II(type II)码本的反馈方式和基于双域压缩(包括上述第一压缩方式和第二压缩方式)的反馈方式等多种反馈方式中,综合考虑反馈开销和反馈精度,以达到同等开销下较高反馈精度的效果。In order to obtain higher feedback accuracy at the same cost, the terminal device may determine a reasonable feedback method according to the number and/or location of frequency domain units to be reported. In a variety of feedback methods including the feedback method of type II (type II) codebook and the feedback method based on dual-domain compression (including the above-mentioned first compression method and second compression method), the feedback overhead and feedback accuracy are comprehensively considered to Achieve the effect of higher feedback accuracy at the same cost.
结合第三方面或第四方面,在某些实现方式中,该预设条件包括:该频域单元组中待上报的频域单元的数量大于或等于x×Q,x为预定义值,0<x≤1,Q表示该频域单元组中从首个待上报的频域单元至末个待上报的频域单元所占的带宽中包含的待上报的频域单元的数量,Q为正整数。With reference to the third aspect or the fourth aspect, in some implementations, the preset condition includes: the number of frequency domain units to be reported in the frequency domain unit group is greater than or equal to x×Q, where x is a predefined value, 0 <x≤1, Q represents the number of frequency domain units to be reported in the bandwidth occupied by the frequency domain unit from the first frequency domain unit to the last frequency domain unit to be reported in this frequency domain unit group, Q is positive Integer.
即,当频域单元组中待上报的频域单元数在频域单元组中所占的比例较大时,可以从频域向量组中选择部分频域向量来作为构建预编码向量的频域向量。That is, when the number of frequency domain units to be reported in the frequency domain unit group occupies a large proportion in the frequency domain unit group, a part of the frequency domain vectors can be selected from the frequency domain vector group as the frequency domain for constructing the precoding vector vector.
结合第三方面或第四方面,在某些实现方式中,该预设条件包括:该频域单元组中待上报的频域单元的数量大于或等于预设门限。With reference to the third aspect or the fourth aspect, in some implementations, the preset condition includes: the number of frequency domain units to be reported in the frequency domain unit group is greater than or equal to a preset threshold.
即,当频域单元组中待上报的频域单元数量较多时,可以将频域向量组中的全部频域向量作为构建预编码向量的频域向量。That is, when there are a large number of frequency domain units to be reported in the frequency domain unit group, all frequency domain vectors in the frequency domain vector group may be used as frequency domain vectors for constructing a precoding vector.
结合第三方面或第四方面,在某些实现方式中,在该待上报的频域单元满足预设条件的情况下,该频域向量的长度N f由该频域单元组中从首个待上报的频域单元至末个待上报的频域单元所占的带宽中包含的待上报PMI的频域单元的数量Q确定,N f和Q均为正整数。 With reference to the third aspect or the fourth aspect, in some implementations, when the frequency domain unit to be reported meets a preset condition, the length N f of the frequency domain vector is selected from the first in the frequency domain unit group The number Q of frequency domain units to be reported from the frequency domain unit to be reported to the last frequency domain unit to be reported in the bandwidth occupied by the frequency domain unit to be reported is determined, and N f and Q are both positive integers.
基于频域单元组中从首个待上报的频域单元至末个待上报的频域单元所占带宽中包含的频域单元的数量确定频域向量的长度,可以使得所选择的频域向量能够保持频域的连续性,更能够准确地反映信道在频域的变化规律。因此有利于获得较高的反馈精度,使得网络设备基于终端设备的反馈所恢复的预编码向量能够更好地与信道适配,进而有利于提高后续的数据传输性能。The length of the frequency domain vector is determined based on the number of frequency domain units included in the bandwidth from the first frequency domain unit to be reported to the last frequency domain unit in the frequency domain unit group, so that the selected frequency domain vector can be made It can maintain the continuity of the frequency domain, and can more accurately reflect the changing law of the channel in the frequency domain. Therefore, it is beneficial to obtain a higher feedback accuracy, so that the precoding vector recovered by the network device based on the feedback of the terminal device can be better adapted to the channel, which is further beneficial to improve the subsequent data transmission performance.
结合第三方面或第四方面,在某些实现方式中,在该频域单元组中待上报的频域单元不满足预设条件的情况下,若该PMI包括频域向量组的指示,该频域向量组中的频域向量的长度N 4由该频域单元组中待上报的频域单元的数量确定,N 4为正整数。 With reference to the third aspect or the fourth aspect, in some implementations, if the frequency domain unit to be reported in the frequency domain unit group does not satisfy the preset condition, if the PMI includes an indication of the frequency domain vector group, the The length N 4 of the frequency domain vector in the frequency domain vector group is determined by the number of frequency domain units to be reported in the frequency domain unit group, and N 4 is a positive integer.
在子带数较小的情况下,可以考虑将整个频域向量组用来构建预编码向量。根据待上报的频域单元的数量来确定频域向量的长度,也就是选择了与频域向量的数量相同个数的频域向量来构建预编码向量。相比于上述由Q确定的频域向量的长度,可以减少用于构建预编码向量的频域向量,从而可以减少加权系数的上报个数,有利于减小反馈开销。In the case where the number of subbands is small, it may be considered to use the entire frequency domain vector group to construct a precoding vector. The length of the frequency domain vector is determined according to the number of frequency domain units to be reported, that is, the same number of frequency domain vectors as the number of frequency domain vectors are selected to construct the precoding vector. Compared with the length of the frequency domain vector determined by Q, the frequency domain vector used to construct the precoding vector can be reduced, so that the number of weighting coefficient reports can be reduced, which is beneficial to reduce feedback overhead.
第五方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括用于执行第一方面或第三方面以及第一方面或第三方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法的各个模块或单元。In a fifth aspect, a communication device is provided, including various modules or units for performing the method in the first aspect or the third aspect and any possible implementation manner of the first aspect or the third aspect.
第六方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括处理器。该处理器与存储器耦合,可用于执行存储器中的指令,以实现上述第一方面或第三方面以及第一方面或第三方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。可选地,该通信装置还包括存储器。可选地,该通信装置还包括通信接口,处理器与通信接口耦合。In a sixth aspect, a communication device is provided, including a processor. The processor is coupled to the memory and can be used to execute instructions in the memory to implement the first aspect or the third aspect and the method in any possible implementation manner of the first aspect or the third aspect. Optionally, the communication device further includes a memory. Optionally, the communication device further includes a communication interface, and the processor is coupled to the communication interface.
在一种实现方式中,该通信装置为终端设备。当该通信装置为终端设备时,所述通信接口可以是收发器,或,输入/输出接口。In one implementation, the communication device is a terminal device. When the communication device is a terminal device, the communication interface may be a transceiver or an input/output interface.
在另一种实现方式中,该通信装置为配置于终端设备中的芯片。当该通信装置为配置于终端设备中的芯片时,所述通信接口可以是输入/输出接口。In another implementation, the communication device is a chip configured in the terminal device. When the communication device is a chip configured in a terminal device, the communication interface may be an input/output interface.
可选地,所述收发器可以为收发电路。可选地,所述输入/输出接口可以为输入/输出电路。Optionally, the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit. Optionally, the input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.
第七方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括用于执行第二方面或第四方面以及第二方面或第四方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法的各个模块或单元。According to a seventh aspect, a communication device is provided, including various modules or units for performing the method in any one of the second aspect or the fourth aspect and any possible implementation manner of the second aspect or the fourth aspect.
第八方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括处理器。该处理器与存储器耦合,可用于执行存储器中的指令,以实现上述第二方面或第四方面以及第二方面或第四方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。可选地,该通信装置还包括存储器。可选地,该通信装置还包括通信接口,处理器与通信接口耦合。In an eighth aspect, a communication device is provided, including a processor. The processor is coupled to the memory, and can be used to execute instructions in the memory to implement the second aspect or the fourth aspect and the method in any possible implementation manner of the second aspect or the fourth aspect. Optionally, the communication device further includes a memory. Optionally, the communication device further includes a communication interface, and the processor is coupled to the communication interface.
在一种实现方式中,该通信装置为网络设备。当该通信装置为网络设备时,所述通信接口可以是收发器,或,输入/输出接口。In one implementation, the communication device is a network device. When the communication device is a network device, the communication interface may be a transceiver or an input/output interface.
在另一种实现方式中,该通信装置为配置于网络设备中的芯片。当该通信装置为配置于网络设备中的芯片时,所述通信接口可以是输入/输出接口。In another implementation, the communication device is a chip configured in a network device. When the communication device is a chip configured in a network device, the communication interface may be an input/output interface.
可选地,所述收发器可以为收发电路。可选地,所述输入/输出接口可以为输入/输出电路。Optionally, the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit. Optionally, the input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.
第九方面,提供了一种处理器,包括:输入电路、输出电路和处理电路。所述处理电路用于通过所述输入电路接收信号,并通过所述输出电路发射信号,使得所述处理器执行第一方面至第四方面以及第一方面至第四方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法。In a ninth aspect, a processor is provided, including: an input circuit, an output circuit, and a processing circuit. The processing circuit is configured to receive a signal through the input circuit and transmit a signal through the output circuit, so that the processor executes any of the first aspect to the fourth aspect and any possible implementation manner of the first aspect to the fourth aspect The method.
在具体实现过程中,上述处理器可以为芯片,输入电路可以为输入管脚,输出电路可以为输出管脚,处理电路可以为晶体管、门电路、触发器和各种逻辑电路等。输入电路所接收的输入的信号可以是由例如但不限于接收器接收并输入的,输出电路所输出的信号可以是例如但不限于输出给发射器并由发射器发射的,且输入电路和输出电路可以是同一电路,该电路在不同的时刻分别用作输入电路和输出电路。本申请实施例对处理器及各种电路的具体实现方式不做限定。In a specific implementation process, the processor may be a chip, the input circuit may be an input pin, the output circuit may be an output pin, and the processing circuit may be a transistor, a gate circuit, a flip-flop, and various logic circuits. The input signal received by the input circuit may be received and input by, for example, but not limited to a receiver, the signal output by the output circuit may be, for example but not limited to, output to and transmitted by the transmitter, and the input circuit and output The circuit may be the same circuit, which is used as an input circuit and an output circuit at different times, respectively. The embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific implementation manner of the processor and various circuits.
第十方面,提供了一种处理装置,包括处理器和存储器。该处理器用于读取存储器中存储的指令,并可通过接收器接收信号,通过发射器发射信号,以执行第一方面至第四方面以及第一方面至第四方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法。According to a tenth aspect, a processing device is provided, including a processor and a memory. The processor is used to read instructions stored in the memory, and can receive signals through the receiver and transmit signals through the transmitter to perform any of the first aspect to the fourth aspect and any possible implementation manner of the first aspect to the fourth aspect Methods.
可选地,所述处理器为一个或多个,所述存储器为一个或多个。Optionally, there are one or more processors and one or more memories.
可选地,所述存储器可以与所述处理器集成在一起,或者所述存储器与处理器分离设置。Optionally, the memory may be integrated with the processor, or the memory and the processor are provided separately.
在具体实现过程中,存储器可以为非瞬时性(non-transitory)存储器,例如只读存储器(read only memory,ROM),其可以与处理器集成在同一块芯片上,也可以分别设置在不同的芯片上,本申请实施例对存储器的类型以及存储器与处理器的设置方式不做限定。In the specific implementation process, the memory may be non-transitory (non-transitory) memory, such as read-only memory (read only memory (ROM), which may be integrated with the processor on the same chip, or may be set in different On the chip, the embodiments of the present application do not limit the type of memory and the manner of setting the memory and the processor.
应理解,相关的数据交互过程例如发送指示信息可以为从处理器输出指示信息的过程,接收能力信息可以为处理器接收输入能力信息的过程。具体地,处理器输出的数据可以输出给发射器,处理器接收的输入数据可以来自接收器。其中,发射器和接收器可以统称为收发器。It should be understood that the related data interaction process, for example, sending instruction information may be a process of outputting instruction information from the processor, and receiving capability information may be a process of receiving input capability information by the processor. Specifically, the data output by the processor may be output to the transmitter, and the input data received by the processor may come from the receiver. Among them, the transmitter and the receiver may be collectively referred to as a transceiver.
上述第十方面中的处理装置可以是一个或多个芯片,该处理器可以通过硬件来实现也可以通过软件来实现,当通过硬件实现时,该处理器可以是逻辑电路、集成电路等;当通过软件来实现时,该处理器可以是一个通用处理器,通过读取存储器中存储的软件代码来实现,该存储器可以集成在处理器中,可以位于该处理器之外,独立存在。The processing device in the above tenth aspect may be one or more chips, and the processor may be implemented by hardware or software. When implemented by hardware, the processor may be a logic circuit, an integrated circuit, etc.; When implemented by software, the processor may be a general-purpose processor, implemented by reading software codes stored in a memory, the memory may be integrated in the processor, may be located outside the processor, and exists independently.
第十一方面,提供了一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品包括:计算机程序(也可以称为代码,或指令),当所述计算机程序被运行时,使得计算机执行上述第一方面至第四方面以及第一方面至第四方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。According to an eleventh aspect, a computer program product is provided. The computer program product includes: a computer program (also referred to as code or instructions) that, when the computer program is executed, causes a computer to perform the first aspect to The fourth aspect and the method in any possible implementation manner of the first aspect to the fourth aspect.
第十二方面,提供了一种计算机可读介质,所述计算机可读介质存储有计算机程序(也可以称为代码,或指令)当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述第一方面至第四方面以及第一方面至第四方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。According to a twelfth aspect, there is provided a computer-readable medium that stores a computer program (also may be referred to as code or instructions) that when executed on a computer, causes the computer to perform the above-mentioned first aspect to The fourth aspect and the method in any possible implementation manner of the first aspect to the fourth aspect.
第十三方面,提供了一种通信系统,包括前述的网络设备和终端设备。In a thirteenth aspect, a communication system is provided, including the aforementioned network device and terminal device.
附图说明BRIEF DESCRIPTION
图1是适用于本申请实施例的用于构建预编码向量的向量指示方法的通信系统的示意图;FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system applicable to a vector indicating method for constructing a precoding vector according to an embodiment of the present application;
图2是本申请实施例提供的用于构建预编码向量的向量指示方法的示意性流程图;2 is a schematic flowchart of a vector indicating method for constructing a precoding vector provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图3和图4是本申请实施例提供的频域单元组和上报带宽的示意图;3 and 4 are schematic diagrams of frequency domain unit groups and reporting bandwidth provided by embodiments of the present application;
图5是本申请实施例提供的位图、上报带宽和频域单元组的示意图;5 is a schematic diagram of a bitmap, a reporting bandwidth, and a frequency domain unit group provided by an embodiment of this application;
图6是本申请另一实施例提供的上报PMI的方法的示意性流程图;6 is a schematic flowchart of a method for reporting PMI according to another embodiment of the present application;
图7是本申请实施例提供的通信装置的示意性框图;7 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图8是本申请实施例提供的终端设备的结构示意图;8 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图9是本申请实施例提供的网络设备的结构示意图。9 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式detailed description
下面将结合附图,对本申请中的技术方案进行描述。The technical solutions in this application will be described below with reference to the drawings.
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统,例如:全球移动通信(global system for mobile communications,GSM)系统、码分多址(code division multiple access,CDMA)系统、宽带码分多址(wideband code division multiple access,WCDMA)系统、通用分组无线业务(general packet radio service,GPRS)、长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)系统、LTE频分双工(frequency division duplex,FDD)系统、LTE时分双工(time division duplex,TDD)、通用移动通信系统(universal mobile telecommunication system,UMTS)、全球互联微波接入(worldwide interoperability for microwave access,WiMAX)通信系统、未来的第五代(5th generation,5G)系统或新无线(new radio,NR)等。The technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can be applied to various communication systems, such as: global mobile communication (global system for mobile communications, GSM) system, code division multiple access (code division multiple access (CDMA) system, broadband code division multiple access) (wideband code division multiple access (WCDMA) system, general packet radio service (general packet radio service, GPRS), long term evolution (LTE) system, LTE frequency division duplex (FDD) system, LTE Time division duplex (time division duplex, TDD), universal mobile communication system (universal mobile telecommunication system, UMTS), global interconnection microwave access (worldwide interoperability for microwave access, WiMAX) communication system, future fifth generation (5th generation, 5G) system or new radio (NR), etc.
为便于理解本申请实施例,首先以图1中示出的通信系统为例详细说明适用于本申请实施例的通信系统。图1是适用于本申请实施例的用于构建预编码向量的向量指示方法的通信系统100的示意图。如图1所示,该通信系统100可以包括至少一个网络设备,例如图1所示的网络设备110;该通信系统100还可以包括至少一个终端设备,例如图1所示的终端设备120。网络设备110与终端设备120可通过无线链路通信。各通信设备,如网络设备110或终端设备120,均可以配置多个天线。对于该通信系统100中的每一个通信设备而言,所配置的多个天线可以包括至少一个用于发送信号的发射天线和至少一个用于接收信号的接收天线。因此,该通信系统100中的各通信设备之间,如网络设备110与终端设备120之间,可通过多天线技术通信。In order to facilitate understanding of the embodiments of the present application, first, the communication system shown in FIG. 1 is taken as an example to describe in detail the communication system applicable to the embodiments of the present application. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system 100 suitable for a vector indication method for constructing a precoding vector according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 1, the communication system 100 may include at least one network device, such as the network device 110 shown in FIG. 1; the communication system 100 may also include at least one terminal device, such as the terminal device 120 shown in FIG. 1. The network device 110 and the terminal device 120 can communicate through a wireless link. Each communication device, such as the network device 110 or the terminal device 120, may be configured with multiple antennas. For each communication device in the communication system 100, the configured multiple antennas may include at least one transmit antenna for transmitting signals and at least one receive antenna for receiving signals. Therefore, the communication devices in the communication system 100, such as the network device 110 and the terminal device 120, can communicate through multi-antenna technology.
应理解,该通信系统中的网络设备可以是任意一种具有无线收发功能的设备。该网络设备包括但不限于:演进型节点B(evolved Node B,eNB)、无线网络控制器(radio network controller,RNC)、节点B(Node B,NB)、基站控制器(base station controller,BSC)、基站收发台(base transceiver station,BTS)、家庭基站(例如,home evolved NodeB,或home Node B,HNB)、基带单元(baseband unit,BBU),无线保真(wireless fidelity,WiFi)系统中的接入点(access point,AP)、无线中继节点、无线回传节点、传输点(transmission point,TP)或者发送接收点(transmission and reception point,TRP)等,还可以为5G,如,NR,系统中的gNB,或,传输点(TRP或TP),5G系统中的基站的一个或一组(包括多个天线面板)天线面板,或者,还可以为构成gNB或传输点的网络节点,如基带单元(BBU),或,分布式单元(distributed unit,DU)等。It should be understood that the network device in the communication system may be any device with wireless transceiver function. The network equipment includes but is not limited to: evolved Node B (evolved Node B, eNB), radio network controller (radio network controller, RNC), node B (Node B, NB), base station controller (base station controller, BSC) ), base transceiver station (BTS), home base station (for example, home evolved NodeB, or home Node B, HNB), baseband unit (BBU), wireless fidelity (WiFi) system Access point (access point, AP), wireless relay node, wireless backhaul node, transmission point (transmission point, TP) or sending and receiving point (transmission and reception point, TRP), etc., can also be 5G, such as, NR, gNB in the system, or transmission point (TRP or TP), one or a group (including multiple antenna panels) of the base station in the 5G system, or it can also be a network node that constitutes a gNB or transmission point , Such as baseband unit (BBU), or distributed unit (DU), etc.
在一些部署中,gNB可以包括集中式单元(centralized unit,CU)和DU。gNB还可以包括射频单元(radio unit,RU)。CU实现gNB的部分功能,DU实现gNB的部分功能。比如,CU实现无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC),分组数据汇聚层协议(packet data convergence protocol,PDCP)层的功能,DU实现无线链路控制(radio link control,RLC)、媒体接入控制(media access control,MAC)和物理(physical,PHY)层的功能。由于RRC层的信息最终会变成PHY层的信息,或者,由PHY层的信息转变 而来,因而,在这种架构下,高层信令,如RRC层信令,也可以认为是由DU发送的,或者,由DU+CU发送的。可以理解的是,网络设备可以为CU节点、或DU节点、或包括CU节点和DU节点的设备。此外,CU可以划分为接入网(radio access network,RAN)中的网络设备,也可以将CU划分为核心网(core network,CN)中的网络设备,本申请对此不做限定。In some deployments, gNB may include a centralized unit (CU) and DU. The gNB may also include a radio unit (RU). The CU implements some functions of gNB, and the DU implements some functions of gNB. For example, CU implements radio resource control (RRC), packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layer functions, DU implements radio link control (RLC), media access control (media access control, MAC) and physical (PHY) layer functions. Since the information of the RRC layer will eventually become the information of the PHY layer or be transformed from the information of the PHY layer, under this architecture, high-level signaling, such as RRC layer signaling, can also be considered to be sent by the DU , Or, sent by DU+CU. It can be understood that the network device may be a CU node, or a DU node, or a device including a CU node and a DU node. In addition, the CU may be divided into network devices in a radio access network (RAN), and may also be divided into network devices in a core network (CN), which is not limited in this application.
还应理解,该无线通信系统中的终端设备也可以称为用户设备(user equipment,UE)、接入终端、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、用户终端、终端、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置。本申请的实施例中的终端设备可以是手机(mobile phone)、平板电脑(pad)、带无线收发功能的电脑、虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)终端设备、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)终端设备、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线终端、远程医疗(remote medical)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端等等。本申请的实施例对应用场景不做限定。It should also be understood that the terminal equipment in the wireless communication system may also be referred to as user equipment (UE), access terminal, subscriber unit, user station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, User terminal, terminal, wireless communication device, user agent or user device. The terminal device in the embodiment of the present application may be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a computer with wireless transceiver function, a virtual reality (virtual reality, VR) terminal device, and an augmented reality (augmented reality, AR) terminal Wireless terminals in equipment, industrial control (industrial control), wireless terminals in self-driving (self-driving), wireless terminals in remote medical (remote medical), wireless terminals in smart grid (smart grid), transportation safety ( Wireless terminals in transportation, safety terminals in smart cities, wireless terminals in smart homes, etc. The embodiments of the present application do not limit application scenarios.
还应理解,图1仅为便于理解而示例的简化示意图,该通信系统100中还可以包括其他网络设备或者还可以包括其他终端设备,图1中未予以画出。It should also be understood that FIG. 1 is only a simplified schematic diagram for ease of understanding and examples. The communication system 100 may also include other network devices or other terminal devices, which are not shown in FIG. 1.
为了便于理解本申请实施例,下面简单说明下行信号在发送之前在物理层的处理过程。应理解,下文所描述的对下行信号的处理过程可以由网络设备执行,也可以由配置于网络设备中的芯片执行。为方便说明,下文统称为网络设备。In order to facilitate understanding of the embodiments of the present application, the following briefly describes the processing procedure of the downlink signal at the physical layer before sending. It should be understood that the processing procedure for the downlink signal described below may be performed by the network device, or may also be performed by a chip configured in the network device. For convenience of explanation, they are collectively referred to as network devices hereinafter.
网络设备在物理信道可对码字(code word)进行处理。其中,码字可以为经过编码(例如包括信道编码)的编码比特。码字经过加扰(scrambling),生成加扰比特。加扰比特经过调制映射(modulation mapping),得到调制符号。调制符号经过层映射(layer mapping),被映射到多个层(layer),或者称,传输层。经过层映射后的调制符号经过预编码(precoding),得到预编码后的信号。预编码后的信号经过资源元素(resource element,RE)映射后,被映射到多个RE上。这些RE随后经过正交复用(orthogonal frequency division multiplexing,OFDM)调制后通过天线端口(antenna port)发射出去。The network device can process the code word on the physical channel. The codeword may be coded bits that have been coded (eg, including channel coding). The codeword is scrambled to generate scrambling bits. The scrambled bits undergo modulation mapping to obtain modulation symbols. The modulation symbols are mapped to multiple layers (layers) through layer mapping, or transmission layers. The modulation symbols after layer mapping are subjected to precoding to obtain a precoded signal. The pre-encoded signal is mapped to multiple REs after being mapped to resource elements (RE). These REs are then orthogonally multiplexed (orthogonal frequency division multiplexing, OFDM) modulated and transmitted through the antenna port.
应理解,上文所描述的对下行信号的处理过程仅为示例性描述,不应对本申请构成任何限定。对下行信号的处理过程具体可以参考现有技术,为了简洁,这里省略对其具体过程的详细说明。It should be understood that the processing procedure for the downlink signal described above is only an exemplary description, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. For the specific processing procedure of the downlink signal, reference may be made to the prior art. For brevity, a detailed description of the specific procedure is omitted here.
为了便于理解本申请实施例,下面先对本申请实施例中涉及的术语做简单说明。应理解,这些说明仅为便于理解本申请实施例,而不应对本申请构成任何限定。In order to facilitate understanding of the embodiments of the present application, the following briefly describes the terms involved in the embodiments of the present application. It should be understood that these descriptions are merely to facilitate understanding of the embodiments of the present application, and should not constitute any limitation to the present application.
1、预编码技术:发送设备(如网络设备)可以在已知信道状态的情况下,借助与信道资源相匹配的预编码矩阵来对待发送信号进行处理,使得经过预编码的待发送信号与信道相适配,从而使得接收设备(如终端设备)消除信道间影响的复杂度降低。因此,通过对待发送信号的预编码处理,接收信号质量(例如信号与干扰加噪声比(signal to interference plus noise ratio,SINR)等)得以提升。因此,采用预编码技术,可以实现发送设备与多个接收设备在相同的时频资源上传输,也就是实现了多用户多输入多输出(multiple user multiple input multiple output,MU-MIMO)。1. Precoding technology: the sending device (such as a network device) can process the signal to be transmitted with the help of a precoding matrix that matches the channel resource when the channel state is known, so that the precoded signal to be transmitted and the channel It is adapted to reduce the complexity of receiving devices (such as terminal devices) to eliminate the influence between channels. Therefore, through the precoding process of the signal to be transmitted, the received signal quality (for example, signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR), etc.) can be improved. Therefore, by using precoding technology, transmission devices and multiple receiving devices can be transmitted on the same time-frequency resources, that is, multiple users, multiple inputs, and multiple outputs (MU-MIMO).
应理解,有关预编码技术的相关描述仅为便于理解而示例,并非用于限制本申请实施 例的保护范围。在具体实现过程中,发送设备还可以通过其他方式进行预编码。例如,在无法获知信道信息(例如但不限于信道矩阵)的情况下,采用预先设置的预编码矩阵或者加权处理方式进行预编码等。为了简洁,其具体内容本文不再赘述。It should be understood that the relevant description of the precoding technology is only an example for easy understanding, and is not intended to limit the protection scope of the embodiments of the present application. In the specific implementation process, the sending device may also perform precoding in other ways. For example, when channel information (such as, but not limited to, channel matrix) cannot be obtained, pre-coding is performed using a pre-coding matrix or a weighting processing method set in advance. For brevity, the specific content of this article will not be repeated here.
2、预编码矩阵和预编码矩阵指示(PMI):PMI可以用于指示预编码矩阵。其中,该预编码矩阵例如可以是终端设备基于各个频域单元(如,子带)的信道矩阵确定的、与各频域单元对应的预编码矩阵。2. Precoding matrix and precoding matrix indicator (PMI): PMI can be used to indicate the precoding matrix. The precoding matrix may be, for example, a precoding matrix corresponding to each frequency domain unit determined by the terminal device based on the channel matrix of each frequency domain unit (eg, subband).
其中,信道矩阵可以是终端设备通过信道估计等方式或者基于信道互易性确定。但应理解,终端设备确定信道矩阵的具体方法并不限于上文所述,具体实现方式可参考现有技术,为了简洁,这里不再一一列举。The channel matrix may be determined by the terminal device through channel estimation or other methods or based on channel reciprocity. However, it should be understood that the specific method for the terminal device to determine the channel matrix is not limited to the above, and the specific implementation manner may refer to the existing technology.
预编码矩阵可以通过对信道矩阵或信道矩阵的协方差矩阵进行奇异值分解(singular value decomposition,SVD)的方式获得,或者,也可以通过对信道矩阵的协方差矩阵进行特征值分解(eigenvalue decomposition,EVD)的方式获得。The precoding matrix can be obtained by singular value decomposition (SVD) of the channel matrix or the covariance matrix of the channel matrix, or by eigenvalue decomposition (eigenvalue decomposition) of the covariance matrix of the channel matrix. EVD).
应理解,上文中列举的预编码矩阵的确定方式仅为示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。预编码矩阵的确定方式可以参考现有技术,为了简洁,这里不再一一列举。It should be understood that the manner of determining the precoding matrix listed above is only an example, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. For the determination method of the precoding matrix, reference may be made to the existing technology, and for the sake of brevity, they are not listed here one by one.
需要说明的是,在本申请实施例中,与频域单元对应的预编码矩阵,可以是指,针对该频域单元反馈的预编码矩阵,例如可以是基于该频域单元上的参考信号进行信道测量和反馈的预编码矩阵。与频域单元对应的预编码矩阵可用于对后续通过该频域单元传输的数据做预编码的预编码矩阵。下文中,与频域单元对应的预编码矩阵也可以简称为该频域单元的预编码矩阵,与频域单元对应的预编码向量也可以称为该频域单元的预编码向量。It should be noted that in the embodiment of the present application, the precoding matrix corresponding to the frequency domain unit may refer to the precoding matrix fed back for the frequency domain unit, for example, it may be performed based on the reference signal on the frequency domain unit Precoding matrix for channel measurement and feedback. The precoding matrix corresponding to the frequency domain unit may be used as a precoding matrix for precoding subsequent data transmitted through the frequency domain unit. Hereinafter, the precoding matrix corresponding to the frequency domain unit may also be simply referred to as the precoding matrix of the frequency domain unit, and the precoding vector corresponding to the frequency domain unit may also be referred to as the precoding vector of the frequency domain unit.
还需要说明的是,在本申请实施例中,网络设备基于终端设备的反馈所确定的预编码矩阵可以直接用于下行数据传输;也可以经过一些波束成形方法,例如包括迫零(zero forcing,ZF)、正则化迫零(regularized zero-forcing,RZF)、最小均方误差(minimum mean-squared error,MMSE)、最大化信漏噪比(signal-to-leakage-and-noise,SLNR)等,以得到最终用于下行数据传输的预编码矩阵。本申请对此不作限定。在未作出特别说明的情况下,下文中所涉及的预编码矩阵(或向量)均可以是指网络设备基于终端设备反馈所确定的预编码矩阵(或向量)。It should also be noted that, in the embodiment of the present application, the precoding matrix determined by the network device based on the feedback of the terminal device may be directly used for downlink data transmission; it may also go through some beamforming methods, for example, including zero forcing (zero forcing, ZF), regularized zero-forcing (RZF), minimum mean square error (MMSE), signal-to-leakage-and-noise (SLNR), etc. To obtain the precoding matrix that is ultimately used for downlink data transmission. This application does not limit this. Unless otherwise specified, the precoding matrix (or vector) referred to below may refer to the precoding matrix (or vector) determined by the network device based on feedback from the terminal device.
3、预编码向量:一个预编码矩阵可以包括一个或多个向量,如列向量。一个预编码矩阵可以用于确定一个或多个预编码向量。3. Precoding vectors: A precoding matrix may include one or more vectors, such as column vectors. A precoding matrix can be used to determine one or more precoding vectors.
当传输层数为1且发射天线的极化方向数也为1时,预编码向量可以是预编码矩阵。当传输层数为多个且发射天线的极化方向数为1时,预编码向量可以是指预编码矩阵在一个传输层上的分量。当传输层数为1且发射天线的极化方向数为多个时,预编码向量可以是指预编码矩阵在一个极化方向上的分量。当传输层数为多个且发射天线的极化方向数也为多个时,预编码向量可以是指预编码矩阵在一个传输层、一个极化方向上的分量。When the number of transmission layers is 1 and the number of polarization directions of the transmitting antenna is 1, the precoding vector may be a precoding matrix. When there are multiple transmission layers and the number of polarization directions of the transmitting antenna is 1, the precoding vector may refer to the component of the precoding matrix on one transmission layer. When the number of transmission layers is 1 and the number of polarization directions of the transmitting antenna is multiple, the precoding vector may refer to the component of the precoding matrix in one polarization direction. When there are multiple transmission layers and there are multiple polarization directions of the transmitting antenna, the precoding vector may refer to the components of the precoding matrix in one transmission layer and one polarization direction.
应理解,预编码向量也可以由预编码矩阵中的向量确定,如,对预编码矩阵中的向量进行数学变换后得到。本申请对于预编码矩阵与预编码向量之间的数学变换关系不作限定。It should be understood that the precoding vector may also be determined by the vector in the precoding matrix, for example, obtained by performing mathematical transformation on the vector in the precoding matrix. This application does not limit the mathematical transformation relationship between the precoding matrix and the precoding vector.
4、天线端口(antenna port):简称端口。可以理解为被接收设备所识别的虚拟天线。或者在空间上可以区分的发射天线。针对每个虚拟天线可以配置一个天线端口,每个虚拟天线可以为多个物理天线的加权组合,每个天线端口可以与一个参考信号对应,因此,每 个天线端口可以称为一个参考信号的端口。在本申请实施例中,天线端口可以是指实际的独立发送单元(transceiver unit,TxRU)。4. Antenna port: short for port. It can be understood as a virtual antenna recognized by the receiving device. Or a transmit antenna that can be distinguished in space. One antenna port can be configured for each virtual antenna, each virtual antenna can be a weighted combination of multiple physical antennas, and each antenna port can correspond to one reference signal, therefore, each antenna port can be called a reference signal port . In the embodiment of the present application, the antenna port may refer to an actual independent transmitting unit (TxRU).
5、双域压缩:包括空域压缩和频域压缩。空域压缩可以是指在空域向量集合中选择一个或多个空域向量,作为构建预编码向量的空域向量。频域压缩可以是指在频域向量集合中选择一个或多个频域向量,作为构建预编码向量的频域向量。被选择的空域向量为空域向量集合中的部分或全部空域向量。被选择的频域向量为频域向量集合中的部分或全部频域向量。5. Dual domain compression: Including air domain compression and frequency domain compression. Spatial domain compression may refer to selecting one or more spatial domain vectors in the spatial domain vector set as the spatial domain vectors for constructing the precoding vector. Frequency domain compression may refer to selecting one or more frequency domain vectors from a set of frequency domain vectors as frequency domain vectors for constructing a precoding vector. The selected airspace vector is part or all of the airspace vectors in the set of airspace vectors. The selected frequency domain vector is part or all of the frequency domain vectors in the frequency domain vector set.
其中,一个空域向量和一个频域向量所确定的矩阵例如可以为空频分量矩阵。被选择的一个或多个空域向量和一个或多个频域向量可用于确定一个或多个空频分量矩阵。该一个或多个空频分量矩阵的加权和可用于构建与一个传输层对应的空频矩阵。换句话说,空频矩阵可以近似为由上述被选择的一个或多个空域向量和一个或多个频域向量所确定的空频分量矩阵的加权和。这里,用于构建一个空频分量矩阵的空域向量和频域向量可以称为一个空频向量对。The matrix determined by one space domain vector and one frequency domain vector may be, for example, a space frequency component matrix. The selected one or more space domain vectors and one or more frequency domain vectors can be used to determine one or more space frequency component matrices. The weighted sum of the one or more space-frequency component matrices can be used to construct a space-frequency matrix corresponding to one transmission layer. In other words, the space-frequency matrix can be approximated as the weighted sum of the space-frequency component matrix determined by the selected one or more space-domain vectors and one or more frequency-domain vectors. Here, the space domain vector and the frequency domain vector used to construct a space frequency component matrix may be called a space frequency vector pair.
因此,当网络设备获取了可用于构建空频矩阵的空域向量、频域向量和加权系数后,便可以基于所构建的空频矩阵进一步确定与各频域单元对应的预编码向量。Therefore, after the network device obtains the space domain vector, frequency domain vector, and weighting coefficients that can be used to construct the space frequency matrix, it can further determine the precoding vector corresponding to each frequency domain unit based on the constructed space frequency matrix.
在一种可能的实现方式中,终端设备可以向网络设备反馈L个空域向量的指示、M个频域向量的指示以及K个加权系数的指示。其中,K≤L×M。其中,L个空域向量和M个频域向量可用于构建得到L×M个空频向量对。L×M个空频向量对中的每个空频向量对可以包括L个空域向量中的一个空域向量和M个频域向量中的一个频域向量。一个空频向量对由一个空域向量和一个频域向量唯一确定。终端设备可以基于该L×M个空频向量对中的部分或全部空频向量对反馈加权系数。因此,终端设备反馈的加权系数的个数K可以小于或等于空频向量对的个数L×M。In a possible implementation manner, the terminal device may feed back indications of L space domain vectors, indications of M frequency domain vectors, and indications of K weighting coefficients to the network device. Among them, K≤L×M. Among them, L space domain vectors and M frequency domain vectors can be used to construct L×M space frequency vector pairs. Each space-frequency vector pair in the L×M space-frequency vector pairs may include one space-domain vector in L space-domain vectors and one frequency-domain vector in M frequency-domain vectors. A space frequency vector pair is uniquely determined by a space domain vector and a frequency domain vector. The terminal device may feedback the weighting coefficient based on some or all of the L×M space-frequency vector pairs. Therefore, the number K of weighting coefficients fed back by the terminal device may be less than or equal to the number L×M of space-frequency vector pairs.
应理解,上文仅为便于理解,示出了双域压缩的一种可能的实现方式,但这不应对本申请构成任何限定。例如,L个空域向量和M个频域向量中的至少一项也可以是预定义的,本申请对此不作限定。It should be understood that the above is only for ease of understanding, and shows a possible implementation manner of dual-domain compression, but this should not constitute any limitation to the present application. For example, at least one of the L space domain vectors and the M frequency domain vectors may also be predefined, which is not limited in this application.
综上,双域压缩在空域和频域都分别进行了压缩。终端设备在反馈时,可以将被选择的一个或多个空域向量和一个或多个频域向量反馈给网络设备,而不再需要基于每个频域单元(如子带)分别反馈子带的加权系数(如包括幅度和相位)。因此,可以大大减小反馈开销。同时,由于频域向量能够表示信道在频率的变化规律,通过一个或多个频域向量的线性叠加来模拟信道在频域上的变化。因此,仍能够保持较高的反馈精度,使得网络设备基于终端设备的反馈恢复出来的预编码矩阵仍然能够较好地与信道适配。In summary, the dual-domain compression is separately compressed in the air domain and the frequency domain. When the terminal device feeds back, it can feed the selected one or more space domain vectors and one or more frequency domain vectors to the network device, instead of separately feeding back the subbands based on each frequency domain unit (such as subband). Weighting factors (including amplitude and phase). Therefore, the feedback overhead can be greatly reduced. At the same time, since the frequency domain vector can represent the change law of the channel in frequency, the linear change of the channel in the frequency domain can be simulated by linear superposition of one or more frequency domain vectors. Therefore, high feedback accuracy can still be maintained, so that the precoding matrix recovered by the network device based on the feedback of the terminal device can still be well adapted to the channel.
关于双域压缩的具体内容可参考提案编号R1-1813002的第三代合作计划(3 rd generation partnership project,3GPP)提案“基于DFT的压缩(DFT-based compression)”。为了简洁,这里省略对该方法的详细说明。 Specific details about dual-domain compression can reference number R1-1813002 proposal of Third Generation Partnership Project (3 rd generation partnership project, 3GPP ) proposal "based compression of DFT (DFT-based compression)". For brevity, a detailed description of this method is omitted here.
6、频域向量(frequency domain vector):本申请实施例中提出的用于表示信道在频域的变化规律的向量。每个频域向量可以表示一种变化规律。由于信号在经过无线信道传输时,从发射天线可以经过多个路径到达接收天线。多径时延导致频率选择性衰落,就是频域信道的变化。因此,可以通过不同的频域向量来表示不同传输路径上时延导致的信道在频域上的变化规律。6. Frequency domain vector (frequency domain vector): a vector used in the embodiment of the present application to represent the change rule of the channel in the frequency domain. Each frequency domain vector can represent a variation law. Since the signal is transmitted through the wireless channel, the transmitting antenna can reach the receiving antenna through multiple paths. Multipath delay causes frequency selective fading, which is the change of frequency domain channel. Therefore, different frequency domain vectors can be used to represent the change law of the channel in the frequency domain caused by the delay on different transmission paths.
下文中为方便说明,假设频域向量记作v。频域向量的长度可以记作N f,N f≥1,且为整数。下文实施例中会详细说明关于频域向量的长度N f的设计,这里暂且省略对频域向量长度的详细说明。 In the following, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the frequency domain vector is denoted as v. The length of the frequency domain vector can be written as N f , N f ≥1, and it is an integer. The design of the length N f of the frequency domain vector will be described in detail in the following embodiments, and the detailed description of the length of the frequency domain vector will be omitted here.
7、频域向量集合:可以包括多种不同长度的频域向量。该频域向量集合中的一个或多个频域向量被选择用于构建预编码向量。7. Frequency domain vector set: It can include frequency domain vectors of different lengths. One or more frequency domain vectors in the set of frequency domain vectors are selected to construct a precoding vector.
在一种可能的设计中,该频域向量集合可以包括多个频域向量。该多个频域向量之间可以两两相互正交。该频域向量集合中的每个频域向量可以取自离散傅里叶变换(Discrete Fourier Transform,DFT)矩阵。In a possible design, the set of frequency domain vectors may include multiple frequency domain vectors. The multiple frequency domain vectors may be orthogonal to each other. Each frequency domain vector in the set of frequency domain vectors can be taken from a Discrete Fourier Transform (Discrete Fourier Transform, DFT) matrix.
例如,该N f个频域向量例如可以记作
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000001
该N f个频域向量可以构建矩阵B f
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000002
For example, the N f frequency domain vectors can be written as
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000001
The N f frequency domain vectors can construct a matrix B f ,
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000002
在另一种可能的设计中,该频域向量集合可以通过过采样因子O f扩展为O f×N f个频域向量。此情况下,该频域向量集合可以包括O f个子集,每个子集可以包括N f个频域向量。每个子集中的N f个频域向量之间可以两两相互正交。每个子集可以称为一个正交组。该频域向量集合中的每个频域向量可以取自过采样DFT矩阵。其中,过采样因子O f为正整数。 In another possible design, the frequency-domain vector set can be extended oversampling factor O f O f × N f is the frequency-domain vectors. In this case, the frequency-domain vector set may comprise O f subsets, each subset may include N f frequency-domain vectors. The N f frequency domain vectors in each subset can be orthogonal to each other. Each subset can be called an orthogonal group. Each frequency domain vector in the set of frequency domain vectors can be taken from an oversampled DFT matrix. Wherein the oversampling factor O f is a positive integer.
例如,该频域向量集合中的第o f(0≤o f≤O f-1且o f为整数)个子集中的N f个频域向量例如可以分别记作
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000003
则基于该第o f个子集中的N f个频域向量可以构造矩阵
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000004
For example, the N f frequency domain vectors in the o f (0≤o f ≤O f -1 and o f are integers) subsets of the set of frequency domain vectors can be written as
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000003
Then, based on the N f frequency domain vectors in the o f th subset, a matrix can be constructed
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000004
因此,频域向量集合中的各频域向量可以取自DFT矩阵或过采样DFT矩阵。该频域向量集合中的每个列向量可以称为一个DFT向量或过采样DFT向量。换句话说,频域向量可以为DFT向量或过采样DFT向量。Therefore, each frequency domain vector in the set of frequency domain vectors can be taken from a DFT matrix or an oversampled DFT matrix. Each column vector in the set of frequency domain vectors may be referred to as a DFT vector or an oversampled DFT vector. In other words, the frequency domain vector may be a DFT vector or an oversampled DFT vector.
在本申请实施例中,频域向量组可以是指由DFT矩阵中的两两相互正交的向量构成的频域向量的集合,也可以是指过采样DFT矩阵中的一个子集。换句话说,频域向量组中的各频域向量之间两两相互正交。因此,频域向量集合可以包括一个或多个频域向量组。In the embodiment of the present application, the frequency domain vector group may refer to a set of frequency domain vectors composed of mutually orthogonal vectors in the DFT matrix, or may refer to a subset in the oversampling DFT matrix. In other words, each frequency domain vector in the frequency domain vector group is orthogonal to each other. Therefore, the frequency domain vector set may include one or more frequency domain vector groups.
8、空域向量(spatial domain vector):或者称波束向量。空域向量中的各个元素可以表示各个天线端口的权重。基于空域向量中各个元素所表示的各个天线端口的权重,将各个天线端口的信号做线性叠加,可以在空间某一方向上形成信号较强的区域。8. Spatial vector (spatial domain vector): or beam vector. Each element in the airspace vector may represent the weight of each antenna port. Based on the weight of each antenna port represented by each element in the space vector, linearly superimposing the signals of each antenna port can form a region with a strong signal in a certain direction in space.
下文中为方便说明,假设空域向量记作u。空域向量u的长度可以为一个极化方向上的发射天线端口数N s,N s≥1且为整数。空域向量例如可以为长度为N s的列向量或行向量。本申请对此不作限定。 In the following, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the space vector is denoted as u. The length of the space vector u can be the number of transmit antenna ports N s in one polarization direction, N s ≥ 1 and an integer. The space domain vector may be, for example, a column vector or a row vector of length N s . This application does not limit this.
关于空域向量的定义可以参考NR协议TS 38.214版本15(release 15,R15)中类型II码本中定义的二维(2dimensions,2D)-DFT向量或过采样2D-DFT向量v l,m。为了简洁,这里不再详细描述。 For the definition of the airspace vector, please refer to the two-dimensional (2dimensions, 2D)-DFT vector or oversampling 2D-DFT vector v l,m defined in the Type II codebook of the NR protocol TS 38.214 version 15 (release 15, R15) For brevity, they are not described in detail here.
9、空域向量集合:可以包括多种不同长度的空域向量,以与不同的发射天线端口数对应。在本申请实施例中,空域向量的长度为N s,故终端设备所上报的空域向量所属的空域向量集合中的各空域向量的长度均为N s9. Airspace vector set: can include a variety of airspace vectors of different lengths to correspond to different numbers of transmit antenna ports. In the embodiment of the present application, the length of the airspace vector is N s , so the length of each airspace vector in the airspace vector set to which the airspace vector reported by the terminal device belongs is N s .
在一种可能的设计中,该空域向量集合可以包括N s个空域向量,该N s个空域向量之间可以两两相互正交。该空域向量集合中的每个空域向量可以取自二维(2dimension,2D) -DFT矩阵。其中,2D可以表示两个不同的方向,如,水平方向和垂直方向。 In a possible design, the set of space domain vectors may include N s space domain vectors, and the N s space domain vectors may be orthogonal to each other. Each space vector in the set of space vectors can be taken from a two-dimensional (2dimension, 2D)-DFT matrix. Among them, 2D can represent two different directions, such as a horizontal direction and a vertical direction.
例如,该N s个空域向量例如可以记作
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000005
该N s个空域向量可以构建矩阵B s
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000006
For example, the N s space vectors can be written as
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000005
The N s space domain vectors can construct the matrix B s ,
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000006
在另一种可能的设计中,该空域向量集合可以通过过采样因子O s扩展为O s×N s个空域向量。此情况下,该空域向量集合可以包括O s个子集,每个子集可以包括N s个空域向量。每个子集中的N s个空域向量之间可以两两相互正交。每个子集可以称为一个正交组。该空域向量集合中的每个空域向量可以取自过采样2D-DFT矩阵。其中,过采样因子O s为正整数。具体地,O s=O 1×O 2,O 1可以是水平方向的过采样因子,O 2可以是垂直方向的过采样因子。O 1≥1,O 2≥1,O 1、O 2不同时为1,且均为整数。 In another possible design, the set of space domain vectors can be expanded to O s ×N s space domain vectors by an oversampling factor O s . In this case, the set of space domain vectors may include O s subsets, and each subset may include N s space domain vectors. The N s space vectors in each subset can be orthogonal to each other. Each subset can be called an orthogonal group. Each space vector in the set of space vectors can be taken from an oversampled 2D-DFT matrix. Among them, the oversampling factor O s is a positive integer. Specifically, O s =O 1 ×O 2 , O 1 may be an oversampling factor in the horizontal direction, and O 2 may be an oversampling factor in the vertical direction. O 1 ≥1, O 2 ≥1, O 1 and O 2 are not 1 at the same time, and are both integers.
例如,该空域向量集合中的第o s(0≤o s≤O s-1且o s为整数)个子集中的N s个空域向量例如可以分别记作
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000007
则基于该第o s个子集中的N s个空域向量可以构造矩阵
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000008
For example, the N s space domain vectors in the o s (0≤o s ≤O s -1 and o s are integers) subsets of the set of space domain vectors can be written as
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000007
Then based on the N s space vectors in the o s subset, a matrix can be constructed
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000008
因此,空域向量集合中的各空域向量可以取自DFT矩阵或过采样DFT矩阵。该空域向量集合中的每个列向量可以称为一个DFT向量。换句话说,空域向量可以为DFT向量。Therefore, each space vector in the set of space vectors can be taken from a DFT matrix or an oversampled DFT matrix. Each column vector in the set of space vectors may be referred to as a DFT vector. In other words, the spatial domain vector may be a DFT vector.
在本申请实施例中,空域向量组可以是指由DFT矩阵中的两两相互正交的向量构成的空域向量的集合,也可以是指过采样DFT矩阵中的一个子集。换句话说,空域向量组中的各空域向量之间两两相互正交。因此,空域向量集合可以包括一个或多个空域向量组。In the embodiment of the present application, the spatial domain vector group may refer to a set of spatial domain vectors composed of two mutually orthogonal vectors in the DFT matrix, or may refer to a subset in the oversampling DFT matrix. In other words, each space vector in the space vector group is orthogonal to each other. Therefore, the set of airspace vectors may include one or more groups of airspace vectors.
10、频域单元:频域资源的单位,可表示不同的频域资源粒度。频域单元例如可以包括但不限于,子带、资源块(resource block,RB)、子载波、资源块组(resource block group,RBG)或预编码资源块组(precoding resource block group,PRG)等。10. Frequency domain unit: a unit of frequency domain resources, which can represent different frequency domain resource granularities. The frequency domain unit may include, for example but not limited to, subband, resource block (resource block (RB), subcarrier, resource block group (RBG) or precoding resource block group (PRG), etc. .
在本申请实施例中,与频域单元对应的预编码矩阵,可以是指基于该频域单元上的参考信号进行信道测量和反馈而确定的预编码矩阵。与频域单元对应的预编码矩阵可用于对后续通过该频域单元传输的数据做预编码。下文中,与频域单元对应的预编码矩阵或预编码向量也可以简称为该频域单元的预编码矩阵或预编码向量。In the embodiment of the present application, the precoding matrix corresponding to the frequency domain unit may refer to the precoding matrix determined based on channel measurement and feedback based on the reference signal on the frequency domain unit. The precoding matrix corresponding to the frequency domain unit can be used for precoding subsequent data transmitted through the frequency domain unit. Hereinafter, the precoding matrix or precoding vector corresponding to the frequency domain unit may also be simply referred to as the precoding matrix or precoding vector of the frequency domain unit.
11、空频分量矩阵:通过一个空域向量和一个频域向量可以确定一个空频分量矩阵。一个空频分量矩阵例如可以由一个空域向量和一个频域向量的共轭转置确定,如u×v H,其维度可以为N s×N f11. Space frequency component matrix: A space frequency component matrix can be determined by a space domain vector and a frequency domain vector. A space-frequency component matrix can be determined by, for example, the conjugate transposition of a space-domain vector and a frequency-domain vector, such as u×v H , and its dimension can be N s ×N f .
应理解,空频分量矩阵可以是由一个空域向量和一个频域向量确定的空频基本单位的一种表现形式。空频基本单位例如还可以表现为空频分量向量,该空频分量向量例如可以由一个空域向量和一个频域向量的克罗内克(Kronecker)积确定;该空频基本单位例如还可以表现为空频向量对等。本申请对于空频基本单位的具体表现形式不作限定。本领域的技术人员基于相同的构思,由一个空域向量和一个频域向量确定的各种可能的形式均应落入本申请保护的范围内。此外,如果对空域向量或频域向量定义了与上文列举所不同的形式,空频分量矩阵与空域向量、频域向量的运算关系也可能不同。本申请对于空频分量矩阵与空域向量、频域向量的运算关系不作限定。It should be understood that the space-frequency component matrix may be an expression form of a basic unit of space-frequency determined by a space-domain vector and a frequency-domain vector. The space-frequency basic unit can also be represented as a space-frequency component vector, for example, which can be determined by the Kronecker product of a space-domain vector and a frequency-domain vector; the space-frequency basic unit can also be represented, for example. Space-frequency vector equivalent. This application does not limit the specific manifestation of the basic unit of space frequency. Based on the same conception, those skilled in the art should consider that all possible forms determined by one space domain vector and one frequency domain vector should fall within the scope of protection of the present application. In addition, if the space domain vector or the frequency domain vector is defined in a different form from the above list, the operation relationship between the space frequency component matrix and the space domain vector and frequency domain vector may also be different. This application does not limit the operation relationship between the space-frequency component matrix, the space-domain vector, and the frequency-domain vector.
12、空频矩阵:在本申请实施例中,空频矩阵可以理解为用于确定预编码矩阵的一个中间量。对于终端设备来说,空频矩阵可以由预编码矩阵或信道矩阵确定。对于网络设备来说,空频矩阵可以是由多个空频分量矩阵的加权和得到,以用于恢复下行信道或预编码 矩阵。12. Space-frequency matrix: In the embodiment of the present application, the space-frequency matrix can be understood as an intermediate quantity for determining the precoding matrix. For the terminal device, the space frequency matrix may be determined by the precoding matrix or the channel matrix. For the network equipment, the space-frequency matrix may be obtained by weighted sum of multiple space-frequency component matrices, which is used to recover the downlink channel or the precoding matrix.
如前所述,空频分量矩阵可以表示为维度为N s×N f的矩阵,空频矩阵也可以表示为维度为N s×N f的矩阵。该维度为N s×N f的空频矩阵可以包括N f个长度为N s的列向量。该N f个列向量可以与N f个频域单元对应,每个列向量可用于确定所对应的频域单元的预编码向量。 As mentioned above, the space-frequency component matrix can be expressed as a matrix of dimension N s ×N f , and the space-frequency matrix can also be expressed as a matrix of dimension N s ×N f . The space-frequency matrix whose dimension is N s ×N f may include N f column vectors of length N s . The N f column vectors may correspond to N f frequency domain units, and each column vector may be used to determine the corresponding precoding vector of the frequency domain unit.
例如,空频矩阵可以记作H,
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000009
其中,w 1
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000010
是与N f个频域单元对应的N f个列向量,各列向量的长度均可以为N s。该N f个列向量可分别用于确定N f个频域单元的预编码向量。
For example, the space-frequency matrix can be written as H,
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000009
Among them, w 1 to
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000010
Are N f column vectors corresponding to N f frequency domain units, and the length of each column vector may be N s . The N f column vectors can be used to determine the precoding vectors of N f frequency domain units, respectively.
应理解,空频矩阵仅为用于确定预编码矩阵的中间量的一种表现形式,不应对本申请构成任何限定。例如,将空频矩阵中的各列向量按从左至右的顺序依次首位相接,或者按照其他预定义的规则排列,也可以得到长度为N s×N f的向量,该向量可以称为空频向量。 It should be understood that the space-frequency matrix is only one form of expression for determining the intermediate quantity of the precoding matrix, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. For example, if the column vectors in the space-frequency matrix are connected in the first order from left to right, or arranged according to other predefined rules, a vector of length N s ×N f can also be obtained. This vector can be called Space frequency vector.
还应理解,上文所示的空频矩阵和空频向量的维度仅为示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。例如,该空频矩阵也可以是维度为N f×N s的的矩阵。其中,每个行向量可对应于一个频域单元,以用于确定所对应的频域单元的预编码向量。 It should also be understood that the dimensions of the space-frequency matrix and space-frequency vector shown above are only examples, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. For example, the space-frequency matrix may also be a matrix of dimension N f ×N s . Each row vector may correspond to a frequency domain unit, which is used to determine the corresponding precoding vector of the frequency domain unit.
此外,当发射天线配置有多个极化方向时,该空频矩阵的维度还可以进一步扩展。如,对于双极化方向天线,该空频矩阵的维度可以为2N s×N f或N f×2N s。应理解,本申请对于发射天线的极化方向数不作限定。 In addition, when the transmitting antenna is configured with multiple polarization directions, the dimension of the space-frequency matrix can be further expanded. For example, for a dual-polarization directional antenna, the dimension of the space-frequency matrix may be 2N s ×N f or N f ×2N s . It should be understood that the number of polarization directions of the transmitting antenna is not limited in this application.
13、信道状态信息参考信号(channel state information reference signal,CSI-RS):可用于下行信道测量和干扰测量等。在本申请实施例中,该CSI-RS主要用于下行信道测量。网络设备可以在预先配置的时频资源上传输CSI-RS。终端设备可以在该预先配置的时频资源上接收CSI-RS,以便根据接收到的CSI-RS进行下行信道测量。13. Channel state information reference signal (channel-state information reference, CSI-RS): can be used for downlink channel measurement and interference measurement. In the embodiment of the present application, the CSI-RS is mainly used for downlink channel measurement. The network device can transmit the CSI-RS on pre-configured time-frequency resources. The terminal device may receive the CSI-RS on the pre-configured time-frequency resource, so as to perform downlink channel measurement according to the received CSI-RS.
应理解,CSI-RS仅为用于信道测量的一种可能的参考信号,不应对本申请构成任何限定。本申请并不排除在未来的协议中定义其他可用于实现相同或相似功能的参考信号的可能。It should be understood that the CSI-RS is only one possible reference signal for channel measurement, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. This application does not exclude the possibility of defining other reference signals that can be used to implement the same or similar functions in future agreements.
14、上报带宽(reporting band):在本申请实施例中,上报带宽可以是指与网络设备他通过信息元素(information element,IE)CSI上报配置(CSI-ReportConfig)中的上报带宽(csi-ReportingBand)字段所对应的带宽。当网络设备通过csi-ReportingBand指示待上报的子带时,该csi-ReportingBand所对应的带宽可以是上报带宽。14. Reporting bandwidth (reporting bandwidth): In the embodiment of the present application, the reporting bandwidth may refer to the reporting bandwidth (csi-ReportingBand) in the CSI reporting configuration (CSI-ReportConfig) via the information element (IE) with the network device. ) The bandwidth corresponding to the field. When the network device indicates the subband to be reported through csi-ReportingBand, the bandwidth corresponding to the csi-ReportingBand may be the reporting bandwidth.
终端设备可以在该上报带宽上接收CSI-RS,以进行信道测量和上报。在本申请实施例中,上报带宽可以是终端设备进行一次CSI上报所基于的CSI-RS所占的频带宽度。The terminal device can receive the CSI-RS on the reporting bandwidth to perform channel measurement and reporting. In the embodiment of the present application, the reporting bandwidth may be the bandwidth occupied by the CSI-RS on which the terminal device performs CSI reporting once.
在一种实现方式中,该上报带宽可以是CSI-RS资源的频域占用带宽。该CSI-RS资源的频域占用带宽可以通过IE CSI频域占用带宽(CSI-FrequencyOccupation)来配置。In one implementation, the reported bandwidth may be the bandwidth occupied by the CSI-RS resource in the frequency domain. The frequency domain occupied bandwidth of the CSI-RS resource can be configured by IE-CSI frequency domain occupied bandwidth (CSI-FrequencyOccupation).
网络设备可以进一步通过csi-ReportingBand字段来指示待上报的子带(即,频域单元的一例)的个数和位置。该字段可以为位图。该位图的长度可以是上述上报带宽中包含的子带数。换句话说,该位图中的首个指示比特至末个指示比特所占的带宽可以是上述上报带宽。该位图中的每个指示比特可以对应于上报带宽中的一个子带。每个指示比特用于指示所对应的子带是否需要上报CSI。例如,当指示比特置“1”时,所对应的子带需要上报CSI;当指示比特置“0”时,所对应的子带不需要上报CSI。应理解,这里所列举的指示比特的值所表达的含义仅为示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。The network device may further indicate the number and location of subbands (that is, an example of frequency domain units) to be reported through the csi-ReportingBand field. This field can be a bitmap. The length of the bitmap may be the number of subbands included in the reported bandwidth. In other words, the bandwidth occupied by the first indication bit to the last indication bit in the bitmap may be the aforementioned reporting bandwidth. Each indicator bit in the bitmap may correspond to a subband in the reported bandwidth. Each indicator bit is used to indicate whether the corresponding subband needs to report CSI. For example, when the indication bit is set to "1", the corresponding subband needs to report CSI; when the indication bit is set to "0", the corresponding subband does not need to report CSI. It should be understood that the meanings expressed by the values of the indication bits listed here are only examples, and should not constitute any limitation to this application.
应理解,上文所列举的用于配置上报带宽的信令以及用于指示待上报的子带的信令仅为示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。本申请对用于指示上报带宽的信令、用于指示待上报的子带的信令以及具体的指示方式均不作限定。It should be understood that the signaling for configuring the reporting bandwidth and the signaling for indicating the subband to be reported are only examples, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. This application does not limit the signaling used to indicate the reporting bandwidth, the signaling used to indicate the subband to be reported, and the specific indication method.
还应理解,上文对上报带宽的说明仅为便于理解而示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。It should also be understood that the foregoing description of the reported bandwidth is only an example for ease of understanding, and should not constitute any limitation to this application.
此外,为便于理解本申请实施例,做出以下几点说明。In addition, in order to facilitate understanding of the embodiments of the present application, the following points are made.
第一,为方便理解和说明,首先对本申请中涉及到的主要参数分别说明如下:First, in order to facilitate understanding and explanation, the main parameters involved in this application are explained as follows:
N f:频域向量的长度,N f≥1且为整数; N f : length of frequency domain vector, N f ≥ 1 and an integer;
N s:空域向量的长度,N s≥1且为整数; N s : the length of the space vector, N s ≥ 1 and an integer;
M:频域向量的上报个数,M≥1且为整数;M: the number of frequency domain vectors reported, M≥1 and an integer;
L:空域向量的上报个数,L≥1且为整数;L: the number of reported space vectors, L≥1 and an integer;
K:加权系数的上报个数,K≥1且为整数;K: the number of reported weighting coefficients, K≥1 and an integer;
R:传输层数,R≥1且为整数。R: number of transmission layers, R≥1 and an integer.
第二,在本申请实施例中,为便于描述,在涉及编号时,可以从0开始连续编号。例如,R个传输层可以包括第0个传输层至第R-1个传输层;又例如,L个空域向量可以包括第0个空域向量至第L-1个空域向量,以此类推,这里不再一一举例说明。当然,具体实现时不限于此,例如,也可以从1开始连续编号。应理解,上文所述均为便于描述本申请实施例提供的技术方案而进行的设置,而并非用于限制本申请的范围。Second, in the embodiments of the present application, for ease of description, when numbering is involved, consecutive numbering may be started from 0. For example, the R transmission layers may include the 0th transmission layer to the R-1 transmission layer; for another example, the L spatial domain vectors may include the 0th spatial domain vector to the L-1 spatial domain vector, and so on, here No more examples will be given. Of course, the specific implementation is not limited to this, for example, it may be consecutively numbered starting from 1. It should be understood that the foregoing descriptions are all settings that are convenient for describing the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application, and are not intended to limit the scope of the present application.
第三,在本申请实施例中,多处涉及矩阵和向量的变换。为便于理解,这里做统一说明。上角标T表示转置,如A T表示矩阵(或向量)A的转置;上角标H表示共轭转置,如,A H表示矩阵(或向量)A的共轭转置。后文中为了简洁,省略对相同或相似情况的说明。 Thirdly, in the embodiments of the present application, many places involve transformation of matrices and vectors. For ease of understanding, a unified description is made here. The superscript T indicates the transpose, for example, A T indicates the transpose of the matrix (or vector) A; the superscript H indicates the conjugate transpose, for example, A H indicates the conjugate transpose of the matrix (or vector) A. In the following, for the sake of brevity, descriptions of the same or similar situations are omitted.
第四,在下文示出的实施例中,以空域向量和频域向量均为列向量为例来说明本申请提供的实施例,但这不应对本申请构成任何限定。基于相同的构思,本领域的技术人员还可以想到其他更多可能的表现方式。Fourth, in the embodiments shown below, the space domain vector and the frequency domain vector are both column vectors as an example to illustrate the embodiment provided by this application, but this should not constitute any limitation to this application. Based on the same conception, those skilled in the art can also think of other possible expressions.
第五,在本申请实施例中,“用于指示”可以包括用于直接指示和用于间接指示。例如,当描述某一指示信息用于指示信息I时,可以包括该指示信息直接指示I或间接指示I,而并不代表该指示信息中一定携带有I。Fifth, in the embodiments of the present application, "for indicating" may include both for direct indication and for indirect indication. For example, when describing certain indication information for indicating information I, the indication information may include direct indication I or indirect indication I, but does not mean that the indication information must carry I.
将指示信息所指示的信息称为待指示信息,则具体实现过程中,对待指示信息进行指示的方式有很多种,例如但不限于,可以直接指示待指示信息,如待指示信息本身或者该待指示信息的索引等。也可以通过指示其他信息来间接指示待指示信息,其中该其他信息与待指示信息之间存在关联关系。还可以仅仅指示待指示信息的一部分,而待指示信息的其他部分则是已知的或者提前约定的。例如,还可以借助预先约定(例如协议规定)的各个信息的排列顺序来实现对特定信息的指示,从而在一定程度上降低指示开销。同时,还可以识别各个信息的通用部分并统一指示,以降低单独指示同样的信息而带来的指示开销。例如,本领域的技术人员应当明白,预编码矩阵是由预编码向量组成的,预编码矩阵中的各个预编码向量,在组成或者其他属性方面,可能存在相同的部分。The information indicated by the indication information is called information to be indicated. In the specific implementation process, there are many ways to indicate the indication information. For example, but not limited to, the information to be indicated can be directly indicated, such as the information to be indicated itself or the Indication index etc. The information to be indicated may also be indirectly indicated by indicating other information, where there is an association relationship between the other information and the information to be indicated. It is also possible to indicate only a part of the information to be indicated, while other parts of the information to be indicated are known or agreed in advance. For example, it is also possible to achieve the indication of specific information by means of the arrangement order of various information pre-agreed (for example, stipulated in a protocol), thereby reducing the indication overhead to a certain extent. At the same time, it is also possible to identify the common parts of the various information and uniformly indicate, so as to reduce the instruction overhead caused by separately indicating the same information. For example, those skilled in the art should understand that the precoding matrix is composed of precoding vectors, and each precoding vector in the precoding matrix may have the same part in terms of composition or other attributes.
此外,具体的指示方式还可以是现有各种指示方式,例如但不限于,上述指示方式及其各种组合等。各种指示方式的具体细节可以参考现有技术,本文不再赘述。由上文所述可知,举例来说,当需要指示相同类型的多个信息时,可能会出现不同信息的指示方式不 相同的情形。具体实现过程中,可以根据具体的需要选择所需的指示方式,本申请实施例对选择的指示方式不做限定,如此一来,本申请实施例涉及的指示方式应理解为涵盖可以使得待指示方获知待指示信息的各种方法。In addition, the specific indication method may also be various existing indication methods, such as, but not limited to, the above indication methods and various combinations thereof. For specific details of various indication methods, reference may be made to the prior art, and details are not repeated herein. It can be seen from the above that, for example, when multiple information of the same type needs to be indicated, there may be cases where different information is indicated in different ways. In the specific implementation process, the required indication method can be selected according to specific needs. The embodiments of the present application do not limit the selected indication method. In this way, the indication methods involved in the embodiments of the present application should be understood as covering Fang obtains various methods of the information to be indicated.
此外,待指示信息可能存在其他等价形式,例如行向量可以表现为列向量,一个矩阵可以通过该矩阵的转置矩阵来表示,一个矩阵也可以表现为向量或者数组的形式,该向量或者数组可以由该矩阵的各个行向量或者列向量相互连接而成,两个向量的克罗内克尔积也可以通过一个向量与另一个向量的转置向量的乘积等形式来表现等。本申请实施例提供的技术方案应理解为涵盖各种形式。举例来说,本申请实施例涉及的部分或者全部特性,应理解为涵盖该特性的各种表现形式。In addition, there may be other equivalent forms of the information to be indicated, for example, row vectors can be expressed as column vectors, a matrix can be represented by the transposed matrix of the matrix, and a matrix can also be expressed in the form of a vector or an array, which is a vector or an array It can be formed by connecting the row vectors or column vectors of the matrix to each other. The Kronecker product of two vectors can also be expressed by the product of one vector and the transposed vector of another vector. The technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application should be understood to cover various forms. For example, some or all of the features involved in the embodiments of the present application should be understood to cover various manifestations of the feature.
待指示信息可以作为一个整体一起发送,也可以分成多个子信息分开发送,而且这些子信息的发送周期和/或发送时机可以相同,也可以不同。具体发送方法本申请不进行限定。其中,这些子信息的发送周期和/或发送时机可以是预先定义的,例如根据协议预先定义的,也可以是发射端设备通过向接收端设备发送配置信息来配置的。其中,该配置信息可以例如但不限于包括无线资源控制信令,例如RRC信令、MAC层信令,例如MAC-CE信令和物理层信令,例如下行控制信息(downlink control information,DCI)中的一种或者至少两种的组合。The information to be indicated may be sent together as a whole, or may be divided into multiple sub-information and sent separately, and the sending period and/or sending timing of these sub-information may be the same or different. The specific sending method is not limited in this application. Wherein, the sending period and/or sending timing of these sub-information may be pre-defined, for example, pre-defined according to a protocol, or may be configured by the transmitting end device by sending configuration information to the receiving end device. Wherein, the configuration information may include, for example but not limited to, radio resource control signaling, such as RRC signaling, MAC layer signaling, such as MAC-CE signaling, and physical layer signaling, such as downlink control information (downlink control information, DCI) One or a combination of at least two of them.
第六,本申请对很多特性(例如克罗内克积、CSI、PMI、频域单元、双域压缩、空域向量、频域向量以及CSI-RS资源等)所列出的定义仅用于以举例方式来解释该特性的功能,其详细内容可以参考现有技术。Sixth, the definitions listed in this application for many characteristics (such as Kronecker product, CSI, PMI, frequency domain unit, dual domain compression, space domain vector, frequency domain vector, and CSI-RS resources, etc.) are only used to To explain the function of this feature by way of example, the details can refer to the prior art.
第七,在下文示出的实施例中,第一、第二、第三、第四以及各种数字编号仅为描述方便进行的区分,并不用来限制本申请实施例的范围。例如,区分不同的阈值、不同的指示信息等。Seventh, in the embodiments shown below, the first, second, third, fourth, and various numerical numbers are only for the convenience of description, and are not intended to limit the scope of the embodiments of the present application. For example, distinguish between different thresholds and different instructions.
第八,在下文示出的实施例中,“预先定义”可以通过在设备(例如,包括终端设备和网络设备)中预先保存相应的代码、表格或其他可用于指示相关信息的方式来实现,本申请对于其具体的实现方式不做限定。其中,“保存”可以是指,保存在一个或者多个存储器中。所述一个或者多个存储器可以是单独的设置,也可以是集成在编码器或者译码器,处理器、或通信装置中。所述一个或者多个存储器也可以是一部分单独设置,一部分集成在译码器、处理器、或通信装置中。存储器的类型可以是任意形式的存储介质,本申请并不对此限定。Eighth, in the embodiments shown below, "pre-defined" can be achieved by pre-storing corresponding codes, tables, or other methods that can be used to indicate relevant information in devices (for example, including terminal devices and network devices), This application does not limit its specific implementation. Wherein, "save" may mean saving in one or more memories. The one or more memories may be set separately, or may be integrated in an encoder or decoder, a processor, or a communication device. The one or more memories may also be partly set separately and partly integrated in a decoder, processor, or communication device. The type of memory may be any form of storage medium, which is not limited in this application.
第九,本申请实施例中涉及的“协议”可以是指通信领域的标准协议,例如可以包括LTE协议、NR协议以及应用于未来的通信系统中的相关协议,本申请对此不做限定。Ninth, the “protocol” involved in the embodiments of the present application may refer to a standard protocol in the communication field, and may include, for example, the LTE protocol, the NR protocol, and related protocols applied in future communication systems, which are not limited in this application.
第十,“至少一个”是指一个或者多个,“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“和/或”,描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B的情况,其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达,是指的这些项中的任意组合,包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如,a、b和c中的至少一项(个),可以表示:a,或,b,或,c,或,a和b,或,a和c,或,b和c,或,a、b和c。其中a、b和c分别可以是单个,也可以是多个。Tenth, "at least one" refers to one or more, and "multiple" refers to two or more. "And/or" describes the relationship of the related objects, indicating that there can be three relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, B exists alone, where A, B can be singular or plural. The character "/" generally indicates that the related object is a "or" relationship. "At least one of the following" or similar expressions refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of single items or plural items. For example, at least one of a, b, and c may represent: a, or, b, or, c, or, a and b, or, a and c, or, b and c, or, a , B and c. Among them, a, b and c may be single or multiple.
下面结合附图详细说明本申请实施例提供的用于构建预编码向量的向量指示方法。The vector indicating method for constructing a precoding vector provided by an embodiment of the present application is described in detail below with reference to the drawings.
应理解,本申请实施例提供的方法可以应用于通过多天线技术通信的系统,例如,图1中所示的通信系统100。该通信系统可以包括至少一个网络设备和至少一个终端设备。网络设备和终端设备之间可通过多天线技术通信。It should be understood that the method provided by the embodiments of the present application may be applied to a system that communicates through multi-antenna technology, for example, the communication system 100 shown in FIG. 1. The communication system may include at least one network device and at least one terminal device. Multi-antenna technology can communicate between network equipment and terminal equipment.
还应理解,下文示出的实施例并未对本申请实施例提供的方法的执行主体的具体结构特别限定,只要能够通过运行记录有本申请实施例的提供的方法的代码的程序,以根据本申请实施例提供的方法进行通信即可,例如,本申请实施例提供的方法的执行主体可以是终端设备或网络设备,或者,是终端设备或网络设备中能够调用程序并执行程序的功能模块。It should also be understood that the embodiments shown below do not specifically limit the specific structure of the execution body of the method provided in the embodiments of the present application, as long as the program that records the code of the method provided in the embodiments of the present application can be executed to The method provided in the embodiment of the application may be used for communication. For example, the execution body of the method provided in the embodiment of the present application may be a terminal device or a network device, or a functional module in the terminal device or network device that can call a program and execute the program.
以下,不失一般性,以网络设备与终端设备之间的交互为例详细说明本申请实施例提供的用于构建预编码向量的向量指示方法。In the following, without loss of generality, taking the interaction between the network device and the terminal device as an example, the vector indication method for constructing a precoding vector provided by an embodiment of the present application will be described in detail.
图2是从设备交互的角度示出的本申请一实施例提供的用于构建预编码向量的向量指示方法200的示意性流程图。如图所示,该方法200可以包括步骤210至步骤250。下面详细说明该方法中的各个步骤。FIG. 2 is a schematic flowchart of a vector indication method 200 for constructing a precoding vector provided by an embodiment of the present application from the perspective of device interaction. As shown, the method 200 may include steps 210 to 250. The steps of this method are explained in detail below.
在步骤210中,终端设备生成第一指示信息,该第一指示信息用于指示一个或多个频域向量。该一个或多个频域向量可用于构建一频域单元组中一个或多个频域单元的预编码向量。In step 210, the terminal device generates first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate one or more frequency domain vectors. The one or more frequency domain vectors can be used to construct a precoding vector for one or more frequency domain units in a frequency domain unit group.
具体地,该第一指示信息所指示的一个或多个频域向量可以是终端设备基于该频域单元组进行信道测量所确定并上报给网络设备的频域向量。换句话说,该第一指示信息所指示的一个或多个频域向量也就是待上报的频域向量,或者说,被选择的频域向量。Specifically, the one or more frequency domain vectors indicated by the first indication information may be frequency domain vectors determined by the terminal device based on the frequency domain unit group for channel measurement and reported to the network device. In other words, the one or more frequency domain vectors indicated by the first indication information are the frequency domain vectors to be reported, or the selected frequency domain vectors.
由于基于该频域单元组上报的频域向量的长度N f可以由该频域单元组中从首个待上报的频域单元至末个待上报的频域单元所占带宽中包含的频域单元的数量Q确定。因此,终端设备可以首先从上报带宽中确定一个或多个频域单元组。对于每个频域单元组,终端设备可以根据频域单元组中待上报的频域单元的位置确定频域向量的长度,进而从相应的频域向量集合中确定待上报的频域向量。 Because the length N f of the frequency domain vector reported based on the frequency domain unit group can be included in the frequency domain unit frequency band from the first frequency domain unit to be reported to the last frequency domain unit to be reported The number of units Q is determined. Therefore, the terminal device may first determine one or more frequency domain unit groups from the reported bandwidth. For each frequency domain unit group, the terminal device may determine the length of the frequency domain vector according to the position of the frequency domain unit to be reported in the frequency domain unit group, and then determine the frequency domain vector to be reported from the corresponding frequency domain vector set.
如前所述,网络设备可以在上报带宽所包含的频域单元上传输CSI-RS。终端设备可以根据网络设备的指示,对其中的部分或全部频域单元反馈CSI。网络设备所指示的需要反馈CSI的频域单元可以称为待上报的频域单元,或者,待反馈的频域单元。As mentioned above, the network device may transmit the CSI-RS on the frequency domain unit included in the reported bandwidth. The terminal device may feed back CSI to some or all of the frequency domain units according to the instructions of the network device. The frequency domain unit indicated by the network device and requiring CSI feedback may be referred to as a frequency domain unit to be reported, or a frequency domain unit to be fed back.
例如,待上报的频域单元可以是网络设备通过上文所述的csi-ReportingBand指示的待上报的子带,也可以是与该待上报的子带对应的其他粒度的频域单元。这里,与待上报的子带对应,可以是指,待上报的频域单元在频域资源上所占的频带与待上报的子带所占的频带相同,只是上报粒度可能不同。关于待上报的频域单元的说明具体可以参见下文中结合图3至图5的相关说明。For example, the frequency domain unit to be reported may be a subband to be reported indicated by the network device through the csi-ReportingBand described above, or may be a frequency domain unit of other granularity corresponding to the subband to be reported. Here, corresponding to the subband to be reported may refer to that the frequency domain unit to be reported occupies the same frequency band on the frequency domain resource as the subband to be reported, but the reporting granularity may be different. For the description of the frequency domain unit to be reported, please refer to the relevant description in conjunction with FIG. 3 to FIG. 5 below.
在本申请实施例中,一个频域单元组可以包括一个或多个待上报的频域单元。一个频域单元组所占的带宽可以是上报带宽的部分或全部。换句话说,一个频域单元组可以是上报带宽的子集。In the embodiment of the present application, one frequency domain unit group may include one or more frequency domain units to be reported. The bandwidth occupied by a frequency domain unit group may be part or all of the reported bandwidth. In other words, a frequency domain unit group can be a subset of the reported bandwidth.
对每个频域单元组,终端设备均可以通过本申请所提供的方法来确定待上报的频域向量。因此,终端设备在接收到上报带宽的配置信令后,可以先确定频域单元组,然后基于每个频域单元组来确定待上报的频域向量。For each frequency domain unit group, the terminal device can determine the frequency domain vector to be reported by the method provided in this application. Therefore, after receiving the configuration signaling for reporting the bandwidth, the terminal device may first determine the frequency domain unit group, and then determine the frequency domain vector to be reported based on each frequency domain unit group.
本实施例中,不失一般性,以一个频域单元组为例详细说明终端设备确定并上报频域 向量的具体过程。In this embodiment, without loss of generality, taking a frequency domain unit group as an example, the specific process of determining and reporting the frequency domain vector by the terminal device is described in detail.
可选地,该方法200还包括:终端设备从上报带宽中确定频域单元组。Optionally, the method 200 further includes: the terminal device determining the frequency domain unit group from the reported bandwidth.
在一种可能的实现方式中,终端设备可以根据预先定义的规则,从上报带宽中确定频域单元组。例如,协议可预先定义从上报带宽中确定频域单元组的规则。In a possible implementation manner, the terminal device may determine the frequency domain unit group from the reported bandwidth according to a predefined rule. For example, the protocol may predefine rules for determining the frequency domain unit group from the reported bandwidth.
该规则例如可以是,将上报带宽中的所有频域单元作为一个频域单元组。终端设备在接收到上报带宽的配置信令后,如上文所述的CSI-FrequencyOccupation,可以将上报带宽全部作为上述频域单元组,以确定待上报的频域向量。The rule may be, for example, to use all frequency domain units in the reported bandwidth as a group of frequency domain units. After receiving the configuration signaling of the reported bandwidth, the terminal device, as described above in the CSI-FrequencyOccupation, can use all the reported bandwidth as the above-mentioned frequency domain unit group to determine the frequency domain vector to be reported.
图3示出了频域单元组和上报带宽的 一例。如图所示,图3示出了包含有40个频域单元的上报带宽。图中每个带阴影的方格
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000011
表示一个待上报的频域单元。
Fig. 3 shows an example of the frequency domain unit group and the reported bandwidth. As shown in the figure, FIG. 3 shows the reporting bandwidth including 40 frequency domain units. Each shaded square in the picture
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000011
Represents a frequency domain unit to be reported.
图3示出的频域单元组所占的带宽为上报带宽的全部带宽。即,该频域单元组包含40个频域单元,其中有29个待上报的频域单元。该规则例如也可以是,在上报带宽中相邻的两个待上报的频域单元之间间隔的频域单元数大于或等于某一预设阈值时,从该相邻的两个待上报的频域单元之间,将该上报带宽分成两部分,分别属于两个频域单元组。其中,该阈值例如可以是预先定义,如协议定义。The bandwidth occupied by the frequency domain unit group shown in FIG. 3 is the entire bandwidth of the reported bandwidth. That is, the frequency domain unit group includes 40 frequency domain units, of which there are 29 frequency domain units to be reported. For example, the rule may also be that when the number of frequency domain units between two adjacent frequency domain units in the reporting bandwidth is greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold, the two adjacent Between frequency domain units, the reported bandwidth is divided into two parts, which belong to two frequency domain unit groups, respectively. The threshold may be defined in advance, for example, as defined by a protocol.
该规则例如还可以是,在上报带宽中相邻的两个待上报的频域单元之间间隔的频域单元数与该上报带宽中所有待上报的频域单元数的比值大于或等于某一阈值时,从该相邻的两个待上报的频域单元之间,将该上报带宽分成两段,分别属于两个频域单元组。其中,该阈值例如可以是预先定义,如协议定义。For example, the rule may also be that the ratio of the number of frequency domain units spaced between two adjacent frequency domain units in the reporting bandwidth to the number of frequency domain units in the reporting bandwidth is greater than or equal to a certain At the threshold value, the reporting bandwidth is divided into two segments from the two adjacent frequency domain units to be reported, which belong to two frequency domain unit groups, respectively. The threshold may be defined in advance, for example, as defined by a protocol.
终端设备在接收到上报带宽的配置信令后,也可以进一步判断该上报带宽中的待上报的频域单元是否连续。在连续性不好的情况下,可以将该上报带宽分成两个或两个以上的频域单元组。After receiving the configuration signaling of the reported bandwidth, the terminal device may further determine whether the frequency domain units to be reported in the reported bandwidth are continuous. In the case of poor continuity, the reported bandwidth can be divided into two or more frequency domain unit groups.
图4示出了将上报带宽分成两个频域单元组的一例。如图所示,图4示出了包含有40个频域单元的上报带宽。图中每个带阴影的方格
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000012
表示一个待上报的频域单元。
FIG. 4 shows an example of dividing the reporting bandwidth into two frequency domain unit groups. As shown in the figure, FIG. 4 shows the reporting bandwidth including 40 frequency domain units. Each shaded square in the picture
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000012
Represents a frequency domain unit to be reported.
图4示出的频域单元组所占的带宽为上报带宽 的部分带宽。图4示出了两个频域单元组,其中,一个频域单元组包含18个频域单元,其中有12个待上报的频域单元;另一个频域单元组包含11个频域单元,其中有8个待上报的频域单元。The bandwidth occupied by the frequency domain unit group shown in FIG. 4 is part of the bandwidth of the reported bandwidth. Fig. 4 shows two frequency domain unit groups. One frequency domain unit group contains 18 frequency domain units, among which there are 12 frequency domain units to be reported; the other frequency domain unit group contains 11 frequency domain units. There are 8 frequency domain units to be reported.
应理解,图4仅为示例,根据相邻的两个待上报的频域单元之间间隔的频域单元数,还可将上报带宽分成更多个频域单元组。It should be understood that FIG. 4 is only an example. According to the number of frequency domain units spaced between two adjacent frequency domain units to be reported, the reporting bandwidth may also be divided into more frequency domain unit groups.
还应理解,上文仅为便于理解,示例性地列举了几种可用于确定频域单元组的规则。但这不应对本申请构成任何限定。例如,该规则还可进一步包括,根据相邻两个待上报的频域单元之间相隔的频域单元数大于或等于某一预设阈值时,从该相邻的两个待上报的频域单元之间,将该上报带宽分成两段或更多段,并将每部分中首部和尾部的不需上报的频域单元去除,构成两个或更多个频域单元组。例如,图4中的左侧的频域单元组可以不包含首个不需上报的频域单元,右侧的频域单元组可以不包含末个不需上报的频域单元。本申请对确定频域单元组的具体规则不作限定。It should also be understood that the foregoing is merely for ease of understanding, and exemplarily lists several rules that can be used to determine the frequency domain unit group. However, this should not constitute any limitation on this application. For example, the rule may further include that, when the number of frequency domain units spaced between two adjacent frequency domain units to be reported is greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold, from the two adjacent frequency domains to be reported Between units, the reporting bandwidth is divided into two or more sections, and the frequency domain units that do not need to be reported at the head and tail of each section are removed to form two or more frequency domain unit groups. For example, the frequency domain unit group on the left in FIG. 4 may not include the first frequency domain unit that does not need to be reported, and the frequency domain unit group on the right may not include the last frequency domain unit that does not need to be reported. This application does not limit the specific rules for determining frequency domain unit groups.
还应理解,图3和图4仅为便于理解频域单元组和上报带宽的关系而示出,图中频域单元组中频域单元的粒度与上报带宽的粒度相同,但这不应对本申请构成任何限定。本申请对于频域单元组中的频域单元的粒度与上报带宽中的频域单元的粒度的大小关系不作限定。例如后文中结合图5示例的频域单元组中频域单元的粒度与上报带宽中频域单元的 粒度是不同的。It should also be understood that FIG. 3 and FIG. 4 are only for the purpose of understanding the relationship between the frequency domain unit group and the reported bandwidth. The granularity of the frequency domain unit in the frequency domain unit group in the figure is the same as the granularity of the reported bandwidth, but this should not constitute the application Any limitation. This application does not limit the relationship between the granularity of frequency domain units in the frequency domain unit group and the granularity of frequency domain units in the reporting bandwidth. For example, the granularity of the frequency domain unit in the frequency domain unit group exemplified below in conjunction with FIG. 5 is different from the granularity of the frequency domain unit in the reporting bandwidth.
在另一种可能的实现方式中,协议可以预先定义,将上报带宽平均分为多个频域单元组,各个频域单元组中包含的频域单元数相同。In another possible implementation manner, the protocol may be pre-defined, and the reported bandwidth is divided into multiple frequency domain unit groups on average, and each frequency domain unit group includes the same number of frequency domain units.
在又一种可能的实现方式中,终端设备可以根据网络设备的指示,从上报带宽中确定频域单元组。例如,网络设备可以通过信令指示终端设备,当前配置的上报带宽可以包括几个频域单元组以及每个频域单元组中所包括的频域单元。In yet another possible implementation manner, the terminal device may determine the frequency domain unit group from the reported bandwidth according to the instruction of the network device. For example, the network device may instruct the terminal device through signaling, and the currently configured reporting bandwidth may include several frequency domain unit groups and the frequency domain units included in each frequency domain unit group.
应理解,上文所列举的用于确定频域单元组的具体方法仅为示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。本申请对于从上报带宽中确定频域单元组的具体方法不作限定。It should be understood that the specific methods listed above for determining the frequency domain unit group are only examples, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. This application does not limit the specific method for determining the frequency domain unit group from the reported bandwidth.
上报带宽中待上报的频域单元可以由网络设备通过信令通知终端设备。The frequency domain unit to be reported in the reporting bandwidth may be notified by the network device to the terminal device through signaling.
可选地,该方法200还包括:步骤220,终端设备接收第二指示信息,该第二指示信息可用于指示上报带宽中待上报的频域单元的位置和数量。相应地,网络设备发送该第二指示信息。Optionally, the method 200 further includes: Step 220, the terminal device receives second indication information, and the second indication information may be used to indicate the position and number of frequency domain units to be reported in the reporting bandwidth. Correspondingly, the network device sends the second indication information.
在一种可能的设计中,该第二指示信息可以为IE CSI-ReportConfig中的csi-ReportingBand。也就是说,网络设备可以通过该csi-ReportingBand指示待上报的子带。如前所述,csi-ReportingBand具体可以为一个长度与上报带宽所包含的子带数相同的位图,以通过位图中的每个指示比特来指示所对应的子带是否为待上报的子带。由于上文中已经对csi-ReportingBand做了详细说明,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。In a possible design, the second indication information may be csi-ReportingBand in IE-CSI-ReportConfig. In other words, the network device can indicate the subband to be reported through the csi-ReportingBand. As mentioned above, the csi-ReportingBand can be a bitmap with the same length as the number of subbands included in the reporting bandwidth, so that each indicator bit in the bitmap indicates whether the corresponding subband is the subband to be reported band. Since csi-ReportingBand has been described in detail above, it will not be repeated here for brevity.
若终端设备上报第一指示信息所基于的频域单元的粒度为子带,则上文所述的待上报的频域单元的个数可以等于csi-ReportingBand所指示的待上报的子带的个数。若终端设备上报第一指示信息所基于的频域单元的粒度小于子带的粒度,则上文所述的待上报的频域单元的个数可以大于csi-ReportingBand所指示的子带的个数。例如,该待上报的频域单元的个数可以是csi-ReportingBand所指示的待上报的子带的个数的整数倍。或者说,每个子带包含的资源块(resource block,RB)数可以是每个频域单元包含的RB数的整数倍。若将子带的粒度大小与上报第一指示信息所基于的频域单元的粒度大小的比值记作α,则α可以为大于或等于1的整数。If the granularity of the frequency domain unit on which the terminal device reports the first indication information is a subband, the number of frequency domain units to be reported described above may be equal to the number of subbands to be reported indicated by csi-ReportingBand number. If the granularity of the frequency domain unit on which the terminal device reports the first indication information is smaller than the granularity of the subband, the number of frequency domain units to be reported as described above may be greater than the number of subbands indicated by csi-ReportingBand . For example, the number of frequency domain units to be reported may be an integer multiple of the number of subbands to be reported indicated by csi-ReportingBand. In other words, the number of resource blocks (RBs) contained in each subband may be an integer multiple of the number of RBs contained in each frequency domain unit. If the ratio of the granularity of the subband to the granularity of the frequency domain unit on which the first indication information is reported is recorded as α, α may be an integer greater than or equal to 1.
需要说明的是,由于该csi-ReportingBand所指示的待上报的子带对应的频域资源均需要上报CSI。故,网络设备通过csi-ReportingBand指示待上报的子带,也就指示了待上报的频域单元。只是终端设备在上报该第一指示信息时所基于的频域单元的粒度可能为子带,也可能为其他粒度。换句话说,无论第二指示信息所指示的频域单元与上文所述的上报第一指示信息所基于的频域单元的粒度是否相同,终端设备都可以根据该第二指示信息确定待上报的频域单元的位置和数量。本申请实施例中,为方便理解,将待上报的频域单元的粒度与上报第一指示信息所基于的频域单元的粒度定义为相同的粒度。It should be noted that all the frequency domain resources corresponding to the subbands to be reported indicated by the csi-ReportingBand need to report CSI. Therefore, the network device indicates the subband to be reported through csi-ReportingBand, which also indicates the frequency domain unit to be reported. It is just that the granularity of the frequency domain unit on which the terminal device reports the first indication information may be a subband, or may be other granularity. In other words, regardless of whether the frequency domain unit indicated by the second indication information is the same as the frequency domain unit based on which the first indication information is reported above, the terminal device can determine to be reported according to the second indication information Position and number of frequency domain units. In the embodiment of the present application, for ease of understanding, the granularity of the frequency domain unit to be reported and the granularity of the frequency domain unit on which the first indication information is reported are defined as the same granularity.
图5示出了第二指示信息、上报带宽和频域单元组的一例。如图所示,该第二指示信息可以通过位图来指示待上报的子带的个数和位置。图中示出的上报带宽可以包括至少10个子带,图中省略号可以表示一个或多个子带。每个子带可对应于位图中的一个指示比特。指示比特置为“1”的比特位所对应的子带可以为待上报的子带。频域单元组可以占用该上报带宽中的部分或全部带宽。图中示出的频域单元组占用了该上报带宽的部分带宽。该频域单元组中的频域单元的粒度可以小于子带。图中示出的频域单元的粒度为子带粒度的1/4。换句话说,每个子带包含的RB的个数可以是每个待上报的频域单元包含的 RB的个数的4倍。即,α=4。在该频域单元组中,从首个待上报的频域单元至末个待上报的频域单元所占带宽中包含的频域单元的个数Q可以由计算式Q=α(N 2-N 1-1)+M 1+M 2确定。其中,N 2表示该频域单元组中的末个待上报的频域单元在上报带宽中所对应的待上报子带的序号,N 1表示该频域单元组中的首个待上报的频域单元在上报带宽中所对应的待上报子带的序号M 1表示首个待上报的子带中包含的待上报的频域单元的个数,M 2表示末个待上报的子带中包含的待上报的频域单元的个数;N 1≥1,N 2≥1,M 1≥1,M 2≥1,且N 1、N 2、M 1和M 2均为整数。 FIG. 5 shows an example of second indication information, reporting bandwidth, and frequency domain unit group. As shown in the figure, the second indication information may indicate the number and position of subbands to be reported through a bitmap. The reporting bandwidth shown in the figure may include at least 10 subbands, and the ellipsis in the figure may indicate one or more subbands. Each subband may correspond to an indicator bit in the bitmap. The subband corresponding to the bit with the indication bit set to "1" may be the subband to be reported. The frequency domain unit group may occupy part or all of the reported bandwidth. The frequency domain unit group shown in the figure occupies part of the reported bandwidth. The granularity of the frequency domain units in the frequency domain unit group may be smaller than the subband. The granularity of the frequency domain unit shown in the figure is 1/4 of the subband granularity. In other words, the number of RBs included in each subband may be 4 times the number of RBs included in each frequency domain unit to be reported. That is, α=4. In this frequency domain unit group, the number Q of frequency domain units included in the bandwidth occupied by the first frequency domain unit to be reported to the last frequency domain unit to be reported can be calculated by the formula Q=α(N 2- N 1 -1)+M 1 +M 2 is determined. Where N 2 represents the sequence number of the subband to be reported corresponding to the last frequency domain unit in the frequency domain unit group to be reported in the reporting bandwidth, and N 1 represents the first frequency to be reported in the frequency domain unit group The sequence number M 1 of the sub-band to be reported corresponding to the domain unit in the reporting bandwidth indicates the number of frequency-domain units to be reported contained in the first sub-band to be reported, and M 2 indicates that the last sub-band to be reported contains The number of frequency domain units to be reported; N 1 ≥1, N 2 ≥1, M 1 ≥1, M 2 ≥1, and N 1 , N 2 , M 1 and M 2 are all integers.
这里,引入M 1和M 2是因为考虑到当首个待上报的频域单元正好为上报带宽中的首个子带,或者,末个待上报的频域单元正好为上报带宽中的末个子带,而上报带宽的首个子带或末个子带的粒度与上报第一指示信息所基于的频域单元的粒度的比值有可能不是α。例如,M 1≤α,M 2≤α。 Here, M 1 and M 2 are introduced because it is considered that when the first frequency domain unit to be reported happens to be the first subband in the reported bandwidth, or the last frequency domain unit to be reported happens to be the last subband in the reported bandwidth However, the ratio of the granularity of the first subband or the last subband of the reported bandwidth to the granularity of the frequency domain unit on which the first indication information is reported may not be α. For example, M 1 ≤ α and M 2 ≤ α.
若M 1=α且M 2=α,则图5示出的上报带宽中,N 2=5,N 1=1,Q=20。 If M 1 =α and M 2 =α, in the reporting bandwidth shown in FIG. 5, N 2 =5, N 1 =1, and Q=20.
应理解,上文示出的用于确定Q值的计算式仅为示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。例如,Q值也可以由频域单元组中末个待上报的频域单元的序号N 2'与首个待上报的频域单元的序号N 1'确定,如,Q=N 2'-N 1'+1。其中,N 1'≥1,N 2'≥1,且N 1'和N 2'均为整数。可以理解的是,当频域单元的粒度与子带的粒度相同时,α=1,即,N 1'=N 1,N 2'=N 2,Q=N 2-N 1+1。例如,图3中示出的频域单元组中,Q值为38。又例如,图4中示出的两个频域单元组中,Q值分别为17和10。 It should be understood that the calculation formula for determining the Q value shown above is only an example, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. For example, the Q value can also be determined by the sequence number N 2 ′ of the last frequency domain unit to be reported in the frequency domain unit group and the sequence number N 1 ′ of the first frequency domain unit to be reported, for example, Q=N 2 ′-N 1 '+1. Wherein, N 1 '≥1, N 2 ' ≥1, and N 1 'and N 2' are integers. It can be understood that when the granularity of the frequency domain unit is the same as the granularity of the sub-band, α=1, that is, N 1 ′=N 1 , N 2 ′=N 2 , and Q=N 2 -N 1 +1. For example, in the frequency domain unit group shown in FIG. 3, the Q value is 38. For another example, in the two frequency domain unit groups shown in FIG. 4, Q values are 17 and 10, respectively.
还应理解,图5仅为便于理解而示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。本申请对于待上报的频域单元的粒度、待上报的频域单元的粒度与子带的粒度的大小关系、频域单元组与上报带宽的关系以及上报带宽包含的子带数(即,位图的长度)不作限定。It should also be understood that FIG. 5 is only an example for ease of understanding, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. In this application, the relationship between the granularity of the frequency domain unit to be reported, the granularity of the frequency domain unit to be reported and the granularity of subbands, the relationship between the frequency domain unit group and the reported bandwidth, and the number of subbands (ie, bits) included in the reported bandwidth The length of the picture) is not limited.
还应理解,图5中示出的对上报带宽的频域占用带宽中各子带的编号仅为示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。例如,对该上报带宽的频域占用带宽中的各子带也可以从1开始编号,或者从其他值开始编号。无论如何编号,从首个待上报的子带至末个待上报的子带所占带宽中包含的子带数不变,或者说,从首个待上报的子带至末个待上报的子带所占带宽中包含的频域单元的数量Q不变。It should also be understood that the numbering of each subband in the bandwidth occupied by the frequency domain of the reported bandwidth shown in FIG. 5 is only an example, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. For example, each subband in the bandwidth occupied by the frequency domain of the reported bandwidth may also be numbered from 1 or from other values. Regardless of the numbering, the number of subbands contained in the bandwidth from the first subband to be reported to the last subband to be reported remains the same, or from the first subband to be reported to the last subband to be reported The number Q of frequency domain units contained in the bandwidth occupied by the band does not change.
还应理解,上文列举的IE CSI-ReportConfig中的csi-ReportingBand仅为第二指示信息的一例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。本申请并不排除通过其他已有信令或通过新增信令来来指示待上报的频域单元的个数和位置的可能。并且,当通过已有信令或新增信令来指示待上报的频域单元的个数和位置时,可以基于与待上报的频域单元相同或不同的粒度来指示。本申请对此不作限定。It should also be understood that the csi-ReportingBand in the IE-CSI-ReportConfig listed above is only an example of the second indication information, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. This application does not exclude the possibility of indicating the number and location of frequency domain units to be reported through other existing signaling or through newly added signaling. Moreover, when the number and location of frequency domain units to be reported are indicated by existing signaling or newly added signaling, it may be indicated based on the same or different granularity as the frequency domain unit to be reported. This application does not limit this.
如前所述,频域向量的长度N f可以由频域单元组中从首个待上报的频域单元至末个待上报的频域单元所占带宽中包含的频域单元的个数Q确定。 As mentioned above, the length N f of the frequency domain vector can be from the number of frequency domain units in the bandwidth occupied by the frequency domain unit from the first frequency domain unit to be reported to the last frequency domain unit to be reported in the frequency domain unit group determine.
可选地,N f=Q。 Optionally, N f =Q.
频域向量集合中可以预先定义不同长度的频域向量的集合。当终端设备确定了Q值,可以直接从频域向量集合中选择具有长度与Q值相等的频域向量来上报。A set of frequency domain vectors of different lengths can be predefined in the frequency domain vector set. When the terminal device determines the Q value, it can directly select a frequency domain vector with a length equal to the Q value from the frequency domain vector set for reporting.
例如,图3所示的频域单元组中,Q值为38,则可以选择长度为38的频域向量。又例如,图4所示的频域单元组中,Q值分别为17和10,则可以分别选择长度为17和10的频域向量。再例如,图5所示的频域单元组中,Q值为20,则可以选择长度为20的频 域向量。For example, in the frequency domain unit group shown in FIG. 3, the Q value is 38, and a frequency domain vector with a length of 38 can be selected. For another example, in the frequency domain unit group shown in FIG. 4, the Q values are 17 and 10, respectively, and frequency domain vectors with lengths of 17 and 10 can be selected. As another example, in the frequency domain unit group shown in FIG. 5, the Q value is 20, and a frequency domain vector with a length of 20 can be selected.
可选地,N f>Q。 Optionally, N f >Q.
频域向量集合中也可以仅定义一些特定长度的频域向量的集合。当终端设备确定了Q值,便可以从频域向量集合中选择长度大于Q值的频域向量。In the frequency domain vector set, only a set of frequency domain vectors of a certain length may be defined. When the terminal device determines the Q value, it can select a frequency domain vector with a length greater than the Q value from the set of frequency domain vectors.
举例而言,频域向量集合中可以定义长度分别为{4,8,12,24,48}的频域向量。当终端设备根据频域单元组中待上报的频域单元的位置所确定的Q值不属于上述列举的长度的集合时,可以选择长度大于Q值的频域向量。For example, frequency domain vectors with lengths {4, 8, 12, 24, 48} can be defined in the frequency domain vector set. When the terminal device determines that the Q value according to the position of the frequency domain unit to be reported in the frequency domain unit group does not belong to the set of lengths listed above, it may select a frequency domain vector whose length is greater than the Q value.
例如,图3所示的频域单元组中,Q值为38,则可以选择长度为48的频域向量。又例如,图4所示的频域单元组中,Q值分别为17和10,则可以分别选择长度为24和12的频域向量。再例如,图5所示的频域单元组中,Q值为20,则可以选择长度为24的频域向量。For example, in the frequency domain unit group shown in FIG. 3, the Q value is 38, and a frequency domain vector with a length of 48 can be selected. For another example, in the frequency domain unit group shown in FIG. 4, Q values are 17 and 10, respectively, and frequency domain vectors with lengths of 24 and 12 can be selected. As another example, in the frequency domain unit group shown in FIG. 5, the Q value is 20, and a frequency domain vector with a length of 24 can be selected.
应理解,上文中所列举的Q值以及频域向量的长度仅为便于理解而示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。此外,在第二指示信息所指示上报带宽中的频域单元的粒度与上报第一指示信息所基于的频域单元组中的频域单元的粒度不同的情况下,Q值可以定义为与待上报的频域单元的粒度对应,也可以与信令所配置的上报带宽中频域单元的粒度(例如上述子带)对应。本申请对此不作限定。It should be understood that the Q values and the lengths of the frequency domain vectors listed above are only examples for easy understanding, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. In addition, when the granularity of the frequency domain unit in the reported bandwidth indicated by the second indication information is different from the granularity of the frequency domain unit in the frequency domain unit group on which the first indication information is reported, the Q value may be defined as The granularity of the reported frequency domain unit corresponds to the granularity of the frequency domain unit in the reporting bandwidth configured by the signaling (for example, the aforementioned subband). This application does not limit this.
下文中,为方便说明,假设上报带宽中频域单元的粒度与上报第一指示信息所基于的频域单元的粒度相同。例如,都为子带。但应理解,这不应对本申请构成任何限定。In the following, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the granularity of the frequency domain unit in reporting bandwidth is the same as the granularity of the frequency domain unit on which the first indication information is reported. For example, all are subbands. However, it should be understood that this should not constitute any limitation on this application.
终端设备在确定了频域向量的长度之后,便可以进一步确定待上报的频域向量。After determining the length of the frequency domain vector, the terminal device can further determine the frequency domain vector to be reported.
可选地,终端设备基于每个传输层分别确定待上报的频域向量。也就是说,用于确定各个传输层上各频域单元的预编码向量的频域向量可以是相互独立的。Optionally, the terminal device separately determines the frequency domain vector to be reported based on each transmission layer. That is to say, the frequency domain vectors used to determine the precoding vectors of the frequency domain units on each transmission layer may be independent of each other.
在一种实现方式中,终端设备可以基于该频域单元组上接收到的参考信号,如CSI-RS,进行信道测量,以确定每个传输层上、与该频域单元组中各频域单元对应的预编码向量。应理解,基于信道测量确定各传输层上与各频域单元对应的预编码向量的具体方法可以参考现有技术,为了简洁,这里省略对该具体过程的详细说明。In one implementation, the terminal device may perform channel measurement based on the reference signal received on the frequency domain unit group, such as CSI-RS, to determine each transmission layer and each frequency domain in the frequency domain unit group The precoding vector corresponding to the unit. It should be understood that the specific method for determining the precoding vector corresponding to each frequency domain unit on each transmission layer based on channel measurement can refer to the prior art, and for the sake of brevity, a detailed description of the specific process is omitted here.
终端设备可以根据同一传输层上各频域单元的预编码向量构建与传输层对应的空频矩阵,并可以通过对空频矩阵进行空域和频域的DFT来确定待上报的频域向量。对空频矩阵进行空域和频域的DFT例如可以通过公式C=B s HH rB f来实现。其中,H r表示R个传输层中的第r(0≤r≤R-1)个传输层上各频域单元对应的预编码向量所构建的空频矩阵。B s表示由预先定义的空域向量集合中的一个空域向量组构建的矩阵。B f表示由预先定义的频域向量集合中的一个频域向量组构建的矩阵。在本申请实施例中,该频域向量集合中各频域向量的长度可以由上文所述的方法确定。C表示由DFT得到的系数矩阵。 The terminal device can construct a space-frequency matrix corresponding to the transmission layer according to the precoding vectors of each frequency-domain unit on the same transmission layer, and can determine the frequency-domain vector to be reported by performing DFT of the space-frequency matrix on the space-frequency and frequency-domain. The spatial and frequency domain DFT of the spatial frequency matrix can be realized by the formula C=B s H H r B f , for example. Where H r represents a space-frequency matrix constructed by the precoding vectors corresponding to each frequency domain unit on the r-th (0≤r≤R-1) transmission layer in the R transmission layers. B s represents a matrix constructed by a group of space domain vectors in a predefined set of space domain vectors. B f represents a matrix constructed by a group of frequency domain vectors in a set of predefined frequency domain vectors. In the embodiment of the present application, the length of each frequency domain vector in the frequency domain vector set may be determined by the method described above. C represents the coefficient matrix obtained by DFT.
需要说明的是,这里仅为便于理解,以空域向量集合中的一个空域向量组和频域向量集合中的一个频域向量组为例,说明终端设备对空频矩阵进行空域和频域的DFT以确定频域向量以及后文所述的空域向量和加权系数的具体过程。当空域向量集合包括多个空域向量组或频域向量集合包括多个频域向量组时,终端设备对空频矩阵进行空域和频域的DFT以确定频域向量以及后文所述的空域向量和加权系数的具体过程与之相似,具体可参考现有技术。为了简洁,这里省略对该具体过程的详细说明。It should be noted that this is only for ease of understanding. Taking a space domain vector group in the space domain vector set and a frequency domain vector group in the frequency domain vector set as examples, it is illustrated that the terminal device performs space and frequency domain DFT on the space frequency matrix The specific process of determining the frequency domain vector and the space domain vector and the weighting coefficient described later. When the spatial domain vector set includes multiple spatial domain vector groups or the frequency domain vector set includes multiple frequency domain vector groups, the terminal device performs spatial and frequency domain DFT on the spatial frequency matrix to determine the frequency domain vector and the spatial domain vector described later The specific process of the weighting coefficient is similar to that of the specific process. For details, please refer to the prior art. For brevity, a detailed description of the specific process is omitted here.
终端设备可以从该系数矩阵C中确定较强的一个或多个列,例如M r个。M r≥1且为 整数。终端设备例如可以根据该系数矩阵C中各列元素的模的平方和大小,确定模的平方和较大的一个或多个列。该系数矩阵C中较强的M r个列可用于确定频域向量集合中被选择的一个或多个频域向量。如,系数矩阵C中较强的M r个列的序号可以是频域向量集合所构建的矩阵B f中被选择的M r个列向量的序号。因此,基于第r个传输层对应的空频矩阵可以确定针对第r个传输层上报的频域向量。 The terminal device may determine one or more strong columns, for example, M r , from the coefficient matrix C. M r ≥1 and an integer. The terminal device may determine, for example, one or more columns with a larger sum of squares of the modulus according to the magnitude of the square sum of the modulus of each column element in the coefficient matrix C. The stronger the coefficient matrix C M r of columns can be used to determine a plurality of frequency domain or frequency-domain vectors in the vector set selected. For example, the numbers of the strong M r columns in the coefficient matrix C may be the numbers of the selected M r column vectors in the matrix B f constructed by the frequency domain vector set. Therefore, the frequency domain vector reported for the rth transmission layer can be determined based on the space frequency matrix corresponding to the rth transmission layer.
其中,待上报的频域向量的个数可以由网络设备通过信令指示,或者,也可以由终端设备自行确定并上报网络设备,或者,还可以预先定义,如协议定义。本申请对此不作限定。The number of frequency domain vectors to be reported may be indicated by the network device through signaling, or may be determined and reported by the terminal device by itself, or may be defined in advance, such as a protocol definition. This application does not limit this.
需要说明的是,当待上报的频域单元的数量小于频域向量的长度N f时,可以对空频矩阵补零。例如,若待上报的频域单元数为N sb,N f>N sb≥1且为整数。则空频矩阵的维度为N t×N sb,可以在该矩阵中填充N f-N sb列零元素,以得到维度为N t×N f的矩阵,以便进行DFT。终端设备和网络设备可以预先约定将N f-N sb列零元素填充在空频矩阵的N sb列之前还是之后。例如,终端设备可以将该N f-N sb列零元素填充在空频矩阵的N sb列之后,网络设备在接收到终端设备反馈的第一指示信息之后,可以将根据第一指示信息恢复出的维度为N t×N f的矩阵的前N sb列抽取出来,以得到维度为N t×N sb的空频矩阵。 It should be noted that when the number of frequency domain units to be reported is less than the length N f of the frequency domain vector, the space frequency matrix may be filled with zeros. For example, if the number of frequency domain units to be reported is N sb , N f >N sb ≥1 and an integer. Then, the dimension of the space-frequency matrix is N t ×N sb , and the matrix can be filled with zero elements of N f -N sb columns to obtain a matrix of dimension N t ×N f for DFT. The terminal device and the network device may be pre-agreed N f -N sb zero element column filled before N sb columns or after space-frequency matrix. For example, the terminal device may fill the N f -N sb column zero elements in the N sb column of the space frequency matrix, and after receiving the first indication information fed back by the terminal device, the network device may recover the first indication information The first N sb columns of the matrix with the dimension N t ×N f are extracted to obtain the space-frequency matrix with the dimension N t ×N sb .
应理解,这里所列举的在N f>N sb的情况下终端设备确定待上报的频域向量的方法仅为示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。终端设备确定待上报的频域向量的具体方法和网络设备恢复预编码向量的具体方法属于内部实现行为,本申请对此不作限定。 It should be understood that the method of determining the frequency domain vector to be reported by the terminal device in the case of N f >N sb listed here is only an example, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. The specific method for the terminal device to determine the frequency domain vector to be reported and the specific method for the network device to restore the precoding vector are internal implementation behaviors, which are not limited in this application.
终端设备在确定了待上报的频域向量之后,可以进一步生成待上报的频域向量的指示信息。终端设备例如可以通过频域向量的组合在频域向量集合中的索引来指示待上报的频域向量,也可以通过各待上报的频域向量的索引来指示各频域向量,还可以通过位图来指示待上报的频域向量,本申请对此不作限定。终端设备上报频域向量的具体方式可以参考现有技术,例如,可以参考type II码本的反馈方式中终端设备上报空域向量的具体方式。After determining the frequency domain vector to be reported, the terminal device may further generate indication information of the frequency domain vector to be reported. For example, the terminal device may indicate the frequency domain vector to be reported by the index of the frequency domain vector combined in the frequency domain vector set, or may indicate each frequency domain vector by the index of each frequency domain vector to be reported, or by bit The figure indicates the frequency domain vector to be reported, which is not limited in this application. The specific method for the terminal device to report the frequency domain vector can refer to the prior art. For example, reference can be made to the specific method for the terminal device to report the air domain vector in the feedback mode of the type II codebook.
进一步地,该第一指示信息还可用于指示一个或多个空域向量。Further, the first indication information can also be used to indicate one or more airspace vectors.
其中,针对第r个传输层上报的空域向量和加权系数可以由上述DFT所得到的系数矩阵C确定。例如,终端设备可以从该系数矩阵C中确定较强的一个或多个行,以确定一个或多个空域向量,例如L r个,L r≥1且为整数。该系数矩阵C中较强的L r个行的序号可以是空域向量集合所构建的矩阵U s中被选择的L r个列向量的序号。 The space domain vector and weighting coefficient reported for the rth transport layer can be determined by the coefficient matrix C obtained by the above DFT. For example, the terminal device may determine one or more strong rows from the coefficient matrix C to determine one or more space domain vectors, for example, L r , L r ≥ 1 and an integer. The sequence numbers of the strong L r rows in the coefficient matrix C may be the sequence numbers of the selected L r column vectors in the matrix U s constructed by the spatial domain vector set.
其中,待上报的空域向量的个数可以由网络设备通过信令指示,或者,也可以由终端设备自行确定并上报网络设备,或者,还可以预先定义,如协议定义。本申请对此不作限定。The number of airspace vectors to be reported may be indicated by the network device through signaling, or may be determined and reported by the terminal device by itself, or may be defined in advance, such as protocol definition. This application does not limit this.
终端设备在确定了待上报的空域向量之后,可以进一步生成待上报的空域向量的指示信息。终端设备例如可以通过空域向量的组合在空域向量集合中的索引来指示待上报的空域向量,也可以通过各待上报的空域向量的索引来指示各空域向量,还可以通过位图来指示待上报的空域向量,本申请对此不作限定。终端设备上报空域向量的具体方式可以参考现有技术,例如,可以参考type II码本的反馈方式中终端设备上报空域向量的具体方式。After determining the airspace vector to be reported, the terminal device may further generate indication information of the airspace vector to be reported. The terminal device may indicate the airspace vector to be reported by the index of the airspace vector combined in the airspace vector set, or may indicate each airspace vector by the index of each airspace vector to be reported, and may also indicate the to be reported by the bitmap. The airspace vector of this is not limited in this application. The specific method of reporting the airspace vector by the terminal device can refer to the prior art. For example, reference may be made to the specific method of reporting the airspace vector by the terminal device in the feedback method of the type II codebook.
应理解,上述一个或多个空域向量可以由终端设备基于信道测量确定,或者,也可以预先配置,如,协议可以预先定义将空域向量集合中的部分或全部空域向量用于构建空频矩阵;或者,还可以由网络设备确定,如,网络设备可以根据上下行信道的互易性确定一 个或多个空域向量。本申请对于空域向量的确定方式不作限定。It should be understood that the one or more space domain vectors may be determined by the terminal device based on channel measurement, or may be pre-configured. For example, the protocol may predefine that some or all of the space domain vectors in the space domain vector set are used to construct the space frequency matrix; Alternatively, it may also be determined by the network device, for example, the network device may determine one or more airspace vectors according to the reciprocity of the uplink and downlink channels. This application does not limit the determination method of the airspace vector.
进一步地,该第一指示信息还可用于指示一个或多个加权系数。Further, the first indication information can also be used to indicate one or more weighting coefficients.
此外,该系数矩阵C中较强的M r个列和较强的L r个行可构建维度为L r×M r的系数矩阵C'。该系数矩阵C'中的L r×M r个元素均为加权系数。其中,第l r行第m r列元素为第l r个空域向量和第m r个频域向量所构建的空频分量矩阵的加权系数。其中,0≤l r≤L r-1,0≤m r≤M r-1,l r和m r均为整数。 In addition, the stronger M r columns and the stronger L r rows in the coefficient matrix C can construct a coefficient matrix C′ with dimensions L r ×M r . The L r ×M r elements in the coefficient matrix C′ are all weighting coefficients. Wherein the first row r m L r L r row elements of the m-th spatial weighting coefficient vectors and space frequency components of the matrix r of frequency-domain vectors constructed. Wherein, 0≤l r ≤L r -1,0≤m r ≤M r -1, l r and m r are integers.
应理解,该系数矩阵C'中可以包括幅度的量化值为零的一个或多个元素。对于该幅度的量化值为零的一个或多个元素,终端设备可以不作上报。It should be understood that the coefficient matrix C′ may include one or more elements whose amplitude quantization value is zero. For one or more elements whose quantized value of the amplitude is zero, the terminal device may not report.
再进一步地,加权系数的上报个数可以预先配置,例如,预先定义,如协议定义,或者,网络设备通过信令指示。本申请对此不作限定。加权系数的上报个数例如可以记作K r,1≤K r≤L r×M r,且K r为整数。该K r个加权系数可以为上述系数矩阵C'中的L r×M r个元素的子集。换句话说,上文所述的L r个空域向量和M r个频域向量所构建的L r×M r个空频分量矩阵中的部分或全部可用于加权求和,以获得与第r个传输层对应的加权系数。 Still further, the number of reported weighting coefficients may be pre-configured, for example, pre-defined, such as protocol definition, or indicated by the network device through signaling. This application does not limit this. For example, reporting the number of weighting coefficients may be denoted as K r, 1≤K r ≤L r × M r, and K r is an integer. The K r weighting coefficients may be a subset of L r ×M r elements in the above coefficient matrix C′. In other words, a spatial vector r L hereinabove and M r of said frequency-domain vectors constructed L r × M r null frequency component of the matrix can be used for part or all of the weighted sum, to obtain the first r Weighting coefficients corresponding to each transport layer.
应理解,由于系数矩阵C'中可以包括幅度较小的一个或多个元素,例如,幅度的量化值为零,或接近于零,故终端设备真正上报的加权系数的个数可以为K r,也可以小于K r,本申请对此不作限定。 It should be understood that, since the coefficient matrix C′ may include one or more elements with a small amplitude, for example, the quantized value of the amplitude is zero, or close to zero, the number of weighting coefficients actually reported by the terminal device may be K r , Can also be less than K r , which is not limited in this application.
终端设备在确定了待上报的加权系数之后,可以进一步生成待上报的加权系数的指示信息。终端设备例如可以通过归一化方式来指示加权系数,本申请对此不作限定。终端设备上报加权系数的具体方式可以参考现有技术,例如,可以参考type II码本的反馈方式中终端设备上报加权系数的具体方式。After determining the weighting coefficient to be reported, the terminal device may further generate indication information of the weighting coefficient to be reported. The terminal device may indicate the weighting coefficient in a normalized manner, for example, which is not limited in this application. The specific method for the terminal device to report the weighting coefficient can refer to the prior art. For example, reference can be made to the specific method for the terminal device to report the weighting coefficient in the feedback mode of the type II codebook.
应理解,上文中仅为便于理解,以第r个传输层为例详细说明了终端设备确定空域向量、频域向量以及所对应的加权系数的具体过程。但这不应对本申请构成任何限定。终端设备确定空域向量、频域向量以及所对应的加权系数的具体方法并不限于上文所述。终端设备例如还可以通过现有的估计算法,如多重信号分类算法(multiple signal classification algorithm,MUSIC)、巴特利特(Bartlett)算法或旋转不变子空间算法(estimation of signal parameters via rotation invariant technique algorithm,ESPRIT)等,确定空域向量、频域向量以及所对应的加权系数。It should be understood that the foregoing is only for ease of understanding. Taking the rth transmission layer as an example, the specific process of determining the space domain vector, the frequency domain vector, and the corresponding weighting coefficient by the terminal device is described in detail. However, this should not constitute any limitation on this application. The specific method by which the terminal device determines the space domain vector, the frequency domain vector, and the corresponding weighting coefficient is not limited to the above. For example, the terminal device can also use existing estimation algorithms, such as multiple signal classification algorithm (multiple signal classification classification algorithm, MUSIC), Bartlett algorithm or rotation invariant subspace algorithm (estimation of signature, parameters, via rotation, variation in technology, algorithm, algorithm). , ESPRIT), etc., to determine the space domain vector, frequency domain vector and the corresponding weighting coefficient.
可选地,终端设备基于R个传输层确定可共用的一个或多个频域向量。也就是说,用于确定各个传输层上各频域单元的预编码向量的频域单元可以是共用的。针对任意两个传输层所确定的频域向量可以是相同的。例如,M(M≥1且为整数)个频域向量。Optionally, the terminal device determines one or more frequency domain vectors that can be shared based on the R transmission layers. That is, the frequency domain units used to determine the precoding vectors of the frequency domain units on each transmission layer may be common. The frequency domain vectors determined for any two transmission layers may be the same. For example, M (M≥1 and an integer) frequency domain vectors.
当R个传输层共用一个或多个频域向量时,终端设备可以根据R个传输层分别对应的空频矩阵来确定一个或多个频域向量。终端设备基于R个传输层来确定待上报的频域向量的具体方法可以与上文所述相似,或者可参考现有技术。为了简洁,这里不再赘述。When R transmission layers share one or more frequency domain vectors, the terminal device may determine one or more frequency domain vectors according to the space-frequency matrices corresponding to the R transmission layers respectively. The specific method for the terminal device to determine the frequency domain vector to be reported based on the R transmission layers may be similar to that described above, or may refer to the prior art. For brevity, I will not repeat them here.
进一步地,该第一指示信息还可用于指示一个或多个空域向量。Further, the first indication information can also be used to indicate one or more airspace vectors.
该R个传输层可以共用一个或多个空域向量。例如,L(L≥1且为整数)个空域向量。终端设备可以根据R个传输层对应的空频矩阵来确定L个空域向量。终端设备基于R个传输层来确定待上报的空域向量的具体方法可以与上文所述相似,或者也可以参考现有技术。为了简洁,这里不再赘述。The R transmission layers may share one or more space domain vectors. For example, L (L≥1 and an integer) space vectors. The terminal device may determine L space domain vectors according to the space frequency matrix corresponding to the R transmission layers. The specific method for the terminal device to determine the airspace vector to be reported based on the R transmission layers may be similar to that described above, or may refer to the prior art. For brevity, I will not repeat them here.
应理解,上述一个或多个空域向量可以由终端设备基于信道测量确定,或者,也可以 预先配置,如,协议可以预先定义将空域向量集合中的部分或全部空域向量用于构建空频矩阵;或者,还可以由网络设备确定,如,网络设备可以根据上下行信道的互易性确定一个或多个空域向量。本申请对于空域向量的确定方式不作限定。It should be understood that the one or more space domain vectors may be determined by the terminal device based on channel measurement, or may be pre-configured. For example, the protocol may predefine that some or all of the space domain vectors in the space domain vector set are used to construct the space frequency matrix; Alternatively, it may also be determined by the network device, for example, the network device may determine one or more airspace vectors according to the reciprocity of the uplink and downlink channels. This application does not limit the determination method of the airspace vector.
进一步地,该第一指示信息还可用于指示一个或多个加权系数。Further, the first indication information can also be used to indicate one or more weighting coefficients.
终端设备确定加权系数的具体方法与上文所述相似,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。The specific method for the terminal device to determine the weighting coefficient is similar to that described above.
并且,加权系数的上报个数可以预先配置。由于上文中对此已经做了详细说明,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。In addition, the number of reported weighting coefficients can be configured in advance. Since this has been explained in detail above, for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
可选地,终端设备基于每个空域向量来确定一个或多个频域向量。也就是说,用于和不同的空域向量构建空频分量矩阵的频域向量可以是相互独立的。Optionally, the terminal device determines one or more frequency domain vectors based on each space domain vector. That is, the frequency domain vectors used to construct the space frequency component matrix with different space domain vectors may be independent of each other.
终端设备可以根据每个空域向量确定一个或多个频域向量。例如,终端设备可以通过对空频矩阵做空域和频域的DFT来确定每个空域向量对应的一个或多个频域向量。终端设备对空频矩阵做空域和频域的DFT例如可以通过公式C=u s HH rB f来实现。其中,u s表示空域向量,由此确定的较强的一个或多个频域向量为与空域向量u s对应的频域向量。终端设备确定较强的一个或多个频域向量的具体方法与上文所述相似,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。 The terminal device may determine one or more frequency domain vectors according to each space domain vector. For example, the terminal device may determine one or more frequency domain vectors corresponding to each space domain vector by performing space domain and frequency domain DFT on the space frequency matrix. The terminal device performs DFT of the space and frequency domains on the space-frequency matrix by, for example, the formula C=u s H H r B f . Where u s represents a space domain vector, and the stronger frequency domain vector or vectors determined therefrom are frequency domain vectors corresponding to the space domain vector u s . The specific method for the terminal device to determine the strong frequency vector or vectors is similar to that described above, and for the sake of brevity, it is not repeated here.
其中,空域向量可以是终端设备基于信道测量确定的。可选地,该第一指示信息还用于指示一个或多个空域向量。空域向量也可以是由网络设备指示的,或者,预先定义的,本申请对此不作限定。The airspace vector may be determined by the terminal device based on channel measurement. Optionally, the first indication information is also used to indicate one or more airspace vectors. The airspace vector may also be indicated by the network device, or it may be pre-defined, which is not limited in this application.
进一步地,该第一指示信息还可用于指示一个或多个加权系数。Further, the first indication information can also be used to indicate one or more weighting coefficients.
终端设备确定加权系数的具体方法与上文所述相似,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。The specific method for the terminal device to determine the weighting coefficient is similar to that described above.
并且,加权系数的上报个数可以预先配置。由于上文中对此已经做了详细说明,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。In addition, the number of reported weighting coefficients can be configured in advance. Since this has been explained in detail above, for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
再进一步地,终端设备也可以对每个空域向量单独确定和上报宽带幅度系数。此情况下,该第一指示信息还可用于指示一个或多个空域向量中每个空域向量的宽带幅度系数。终端设备针对每个空域向量确定宽带幅度系数的具体方法可以参考现有技术,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。Still further, the terminal device can also individually determine and report the broadband amplitude coefficient for each spatial domain vector. In this case, the first indication information may also be used to indicate the broadband amplitude coefficient of each spatial domain vector in one or more spatial domain vectors. The specific method for the terminal device to determine the broadband amplitude coefficient for each spatial domain vector can refer to the prior art, and for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
应理解,本申请对于频域向量与空域向量的对应关系、频域向量与传输层的对应关系以及频域向量的具体确定方式不作限定。本申请对于终端设备上报空域向量、频域向量以及加权系数的具体方法不作限定。本申请对于终端设备上报的空域向量的数量、频域向量的数量以及加权系数的数量均不做限定。It should be understood that the application does not limit the correspondence between the frequency domain vector and the space domain vector, the correspondence relationship between the frequency domain vector and the transmission layer, and the specific determination method of the frequency domain vector. This application does not limit the specific method for the terminal device to report the space domain vector, frequency domain vector, and weighting coefficient. This application does not limit the number of spatial domain vectors, frequency domain vectors, and weighting coefficients reported by the terminal device.
基于上文所述的方法,终端设备可以确定并生成待上报的第一指示信息。Based on the method described above, the terminal device may determine and generate first indication information to be reported.
然而,某些情况下,待上报的频域单元在上报带宽中的分布并不是连续的。例如,待上报的频域单元在上报带宽中分布较稀疏。在这种情况下,待上报的频域单元可能并不具有较好的频域连续性,若仍采用上文所述的双域压缩方式来反馈预编码向量,可能并不能够很好地与下行信道适配。并且,若待上报的频域单元数量较少,基于type II码本的反馈方式对每个频域单元分别上报,也并不会带来较大的反馈开销。因此,终端设备确定该第一指示信息之前可以进一步判断是否采用双域压缩的方式来反馈预编码向量。However, in some cases, the distribution of frequency domain units to be reported in the reporting bandwidth is not continuous. For example, the frequency domain units to be reported are sparsely distributed in the reporting bandwidth. In this case, the frequency domain unit to be reported may not have good frequency domain continuity. If the dual domain compression method described above is still used to feed back the precoding vector, it may not be able to communicate well with Downstream channel adaptation. In addition, if the number of frequency domain units to be reported is small, the feedback method based on the type II codebook is reported separately for each frequency domain unit, which does not cause a large feedback overhead. Therefore, before determining the first indication information, the terminal device may further determine whether to use the dual-domain compression method to feed back the precoding vector.
可选地,步骤210具体包括:终端设备在频域单元组中待上报的频域单元满足预设条件的情况下,确定第一指示信息。Optionally, step 210 specifically includes the terminal device determining the first indication information when the frequency domain unit to be reported in the frequency domain unit group meets the preset condition.
也就是说,终端设备在确定了待上报的频域单元满足预设条件的情况下,采用双域压缩的方式来反馈预编码向量,进而确定上述第一指示信息。That is to say, when determining that the frequency domain unit to be reported satisfies the preset condition, the terminal device uses a dual-domain compression method to feed back the precoding vector, and then determines the first indication information.
例如,该预设条件可以是:频域单元组中待上报的频域单元的数量大于或等于x×Q,x为预定义值,0<x≤1。或者说,频域单元组中待上报的频域单元的数量与Q的比值大于或等于x。可选地,x=0.5。For example, the preset condition may be: the number of frequency domain units to be reported in the frequency domain unit group is greater than or equal to x×Q, x is a predefined value, and 0<x≦1. In other words, the ratio of the number of frequency domain units to be reported in the frequency domain unit group to Q is greater than or equal to x. Optionally, x=0.5.
其中,该Q个频域单元由频域单元组中首个待上报的频域单元至末个待上报的频域单元中所有的频域单元构成,可能占用该频域单元组的部分或全部带宽。当待上报的频域单元在该Q个频域单元中所占的比例较大时,可以认为待上报的频域单元的分布较为连续,则可以基于上文所述的方法确定第一指示信息。Among them, the Q frequency domain units are composed of all frequency domain units in the first frequency domain unit to be reported in the frequency domain unit group to the last frequency domain unit to be reported, and may occupy part or all of the frequency domain unit group bandwidth. When the frequency domain unit to be reported occupies a large proportion in the Q frequency domain units, it may be considered that the distribution of the frequency domain unit to be reported is continuous, and the first indication information may be determined based on the method described above .
以图3所示为例,图3示出的频域单元组中待上报的频域单元数为29,Q值为38,29>0.5×38,故待上报的频域单元满足预设条件,终端设备可以基于上文所述的方法确定第一指示信息。Taking FIG. 3 as an example, the number of frequency domain units to be reported in the frequency domain unit group shown in FIG. 3 is 29, the Q value is 38, and 29>0.5×38, so the frequency domain units to be reported meet the preset conditions , The terminal device may determine the first indication information based on the method described above.
应理解,上文对x的取值仅为示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。本申请对于x的取值不作限定。It should be understood that the value of x above is only an example, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. This application does not limit the value of x.
又例如,该预设条件可以是:频域单元组中待上报的频域单元的数量大于或等于预定义的第一阈值。For another example, the preset condition may be: the number of frequency domain units to be reported in the frequency domain unit group is greater than or equal to a predefined first threshold.
即,当频域单元组中待上报的频域单元的数量较多时,可以基于上文所述的方法确定第一指示信息。That is, when the number of frequency domain units to be reported in the frequency domain unit group is large, the first indication information may be determined based on the method described above.
又例如,该预设条件可以是:频域单元组中待上报的频域单元的数量大于或等于预定义的第二阈值,且Q值大于或等于预定义的第三阈值。For another example, the preset condition may be: the number of frequency domain units to be reported in the frequency domain unit group is greater than or equal to a predefined second threshold, and the Q value is greater than or equal to a predefined third threshold.
即,当频域单元组中待上报的频域单元的数量较多且Q值较大时,可以基于上文所述的方法确定第一指示信息。其中,第二阈值和第三阈值可以是相互独立的,本申请对于第二阈值和第三阈值的大小关系不作限定。That is, when the number of frequency domain units to be reported in the frequency domain unit group is large and the Q value is large, the first indication information may be determined based on the method described above. Wherein, the second threshold and the third threshold may be independent of each other, and the size relationship between the second threshold and the third threshold is not limited in this application.
又例如,该预设条件可以是:频域单元组中待上报的频域单元数大于或等于预定义的第四阈值,且频域单元组中待上报的频域单元的数量大于或等于y×Q,0<y≤1,y为预定义值。For another example, the preset condition may be: the number of frequency domain units to be reported in the frequency domain unit group is greater than or equal to a predefined fourth threshold, and the number of frequency domain units to be reported in the frequency domain unit group is greater than or equal to y ×Q, 0<y≤1, y is a predefined value.
即,当频域单元组中待上报的频域单元的数量较多且在Q个频域单元中所占的比例较大时,可以基于上文所述的方法确定第一指示信息。That is, when the number of frequency domain units to be reported in the frequency domain unit group is large and the proportion in Q frequency domain units is large, the first indication information may be determined based on the method described above.
又例如,该预设条件可以是:频域单元组中不需上报的频域单元数小于或等于预定义的第五阈值,且Q值大于或等于预定义的第六阈值。For another example, the preset condition may be that the number of frequency domain units that do not need to be reported in the frequency domain unit group is less than or equal to a predefined fifth threshold, and the Q value is greater than or equal to a predefined sixth threshold.
即,当频域单元组中不需上报的频域单元数较少且Q值较大时,可以基于上文所述的方法确定第一指示信息。That is, when the number of frequency domain units that do not need to be reported in the frequency domain unit group is small and the Q value is large, the first indication information may be determined based on the method described above.
又例如,该预设条件可以是:频域单元组中不需上报的频域单元数小于或等于预定义的第七阈值,且不需上报的频域单元数小于或等于z×Q,0<z≤1,z和第六阈值均为预定义值。For another example, the preset condition may be: the number of frequency domain units that do not need to be reported in the frequency domain unit group is less than or equal to a predefined seventh threshold, and the number of frequency domain units that do not need to be reported are less than or equal to z×Q, 0 <z≤1, z and the sixth threshold are predefined values.
即,当频域单元组中不需上报的频域单元数较少,且在Q个频域单元中所占的比例较小时,可以认为该Q个频域单元中的大部分频域单元都是待上报的频域单元,则可以基于上文所述的方法确定第一指示信息。That is, when the number of frequency domain units that do not need to be reported in the frequency domain unit group is small, and the proportion in the Q frequency domain units is small, it can be considered that most frequency domain units in the Q frequency domain units are Is the frequency domain unit to be reported, the first indication information may be determined based on the method described above.
又例如,该预设条件可以是:频域单元组中不需上报的频域单元数小于或等于第八阈 值。For another example, the preset condition may be that the number of frequency domain units in the frequency domain unit group that does not need to be reported is less than or equal to the eighth threshold.
即,当频域单元组中不需上报的频域单元数较少时,可以认为该频域单元组中的大部分频域单元都是待上报的频域单元,故可以认为待上报的频域单元在频域单元组中的分布较连续,可以基于上文所述的方法确定第一指示信息。That is, when the number of frequency domain units that do not need to be reported in the frequency domain unit group is small, it can be considered that most of the frequency domain units in the frequency domain unit group are frequency domain units to be reported, so the frequency to be reported can be considered The distribution of the domain units in the frequency domain unit group is relatively continuous, and the first indication information may be determined based on the method described above.
应理解,上文仅为便于理解,示出了多个预定义值,例如第一阈值至第七阈值以及x、y、z等。各预定义值之间可以是相互独立的,并且,本申请对于各预定值的具体取值不作限定。It should be understood that the foregoing is merely for ease of understanding, and a plurality of predefined values are shown, such as the first threshold to the seventh threshold and x, y, z, and so on. The predefined values may be independent of each other, and the specific value of each predetermined value is not limited in this application.
还应理解,上文仅为便于理解,示出了多种用于判断是否基于双域压缩方式来反馈预编码向量的预设条件。但这不应对本申请构成任何限定。当协议定义了某一预设条件作为用于判断是否采用双域压缩方式来反馈预编码向量时,终端设备可以基于此预设条件来确定反馈方式,网络设备也可以基于相同的预设条件,根据接收到的反馈恢复预编码向量。It should also be understood that the foregoing is merely for ease of understanding, and shows various preset conditions for determining whether to feed back the precoding vector based on the dual-domain compression mode. However, this should not constitute any limitation on this application. When the protocol defines a preset condition as a criterion for determining whether to use the dual-domain compression method to feed back the precoding vector, the terminal device may determine the feedback method based on the preset condition, and the network device may also be based on the same preset condition. The precoding vector is restored according to the received feedback.
在步骤230中,终端设备发送该第一指示信息。相应地,网络设备接收该第一指示信息。In step 230, the terminal device sends the first indication information. Correspondingly, the network device receives the first indication information.
具体地,该第一指示信息可以是PMI,也可以是PMI中的部分信元,还可以是其他信息。本申请对此不作限定。该第一指示信息可以携带在现有技术中的一个或者多个消息中由终端设备发送给网络设备,也可以携带在本申请新设计的一个或者多个消息中由终端设备发送给网络设备。终端设备例如可以通过物理上行资源,如物理上行共享信道(physical uplink share channel,PUSCH)或物理上行控制信道(physical uplink control channel,PUCCH),向网络设备发送该第一指示信息,以便于网络设备基于该第一指示信息恢复预编码向量。Specifically, the first indication information may be PMI, or some information elements in the PMI, or other information. This application does not limit this. The first indication information may be carried in one or more messages in the prior art and sent by the terminal device to the network device, or may be carried in one or more messages newly designed in the present application and sent by the terminal device to the network device. For example, the terminal device may send the first indication information to the network device through physical uplink resources, such as a physical uplink shared channel (physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) or a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH), to facilitate the network device The precoding vector is restored based on the first indication information.
终端设备通过物理上行资源向网络设备发送第一指示信息的具体方法可以与现有技术相同,为了简洁,这里省略对其具体过程的详细说明。The specific method for the terminal device to send the first indication information to the network device through the physical uplink resource may be the same as that in the prior art, and for the sake of brevity, a detailed description of its specific process is omitted here.
在步骤240中,网络设备根据该第一指示信息确定一个或多个频域向量。In step 240, the network device determines one or more frequency domain vectors according to the first indication information.
网络设备可以根据第一指示信息,确定终端设备所反馈的一个或多个频域向量。The network device may determine one or more frequency domain vectors fed back by the terminal device according to the first indication information.
网络设备根据第一指示信息确定一个或多个频域向量的方法与终端设备确定频域向量的方法相对应。The method for the network device to determine one or more frequency domain vectors according to the first indication information corresponds to the method for the terminal device to determine the frequency domain vectors.
若终端设备基于每个传输层分别上报一个或多个频域向量,则网络设备可以分别确定与每个传输层对应的一个或多个频域向量。若终端设备基于R个传输层上报共用的一个或多个频域向量,则终端设备可以确定可被R个传输层共用的一个或多个频域向量。若终端设备基于每个空域向量分别上报一个或多个频域向量,则网络设备可以分别确定与每个空域向量对应的一个或多个频域向量。If the terminal device reports one or more frequency domain vectors based on each transmission layer, the network device may separately determine one or more frequency domain vectors corresponding to each transmission layer. If the terminal device reports one or more frequency domain vectors based on the R transmission layers, the terminal device may determine one or more frequency domain vectors that can be shared by the R transmission layers. If the terminal device reports one or more frequency domain vectors based on each space domain vector, the network device may separately determine one or more frequency domain vectors corresponding to each space domain vector.
终端设备根据第一指示信息确定一个或多个频域向量的方法与终端设备频域向量的指示信息的方法相对应。The method for the terminal device to determine one or more frequency domain vectors according to the first indication information corresponds to the method for the indication information for the frequency domain vectors of the terminal device.
若终端设备采用频域向量的组合的索引来指示被选择的频域向量,则网络设备可以根据该索引从频域向量集合中确定终端设备所指示的一个或多个频域向量。若终端设备采用各频域向量的索引来指示被选择的频域向量,则网络设备可以根据各索引从频域向量集合中确定终端设备所指示的一个或多个频域向量。若终端设备采用位图来指示频域向量,则网络设备可以根据该位图与频域向量集合中各频域向量的对应关系,确定终端设备所指示的一个或多个频域向量。If the terminal device uses a combined index of frequency domain vectors to indicate the selected frequency domain vector, the network device may determine one or more frequency domain vectors indicated by the terminal device from the frequency domain vector set according to the index. If the terminal device uses the index of each frequency domain vector to indicate the selected frequency domain vector, the network device may determine one or more frequency domain vectors indicated by the terminal device from the set of frequency domain vectors according to each index. If the terminal device uses a bitmap to indicate the frequency domain vector, the network device may determine one or more frequency domain vectors indicated by the terminal device according to the correspondence between the bitmap and each frequency domain vector in the frequency domain vector set.
进一步地,该第一指示信息还可用于指示一个或多个空域向量和一个或多个加权系数。网络设备可以根据第一指示信息确定一个或多个空域向量以及一个或多个加权系数。同理,网络设备根据第一指示信息确定空域向量的方法和终端设备生成空域向量的指示信息的方法相对应。网络设备根据第一指示信息确定加权系数的方法和终端设备生成加权系数的指示信息的方法相对应。由于网络设备根据第一指示信息确定空域向量和加权系数的具体方法可以参考参考现有技术,为了简洁,这里省略对该具体过程的详细说明。Further, the first indication information can also be used to indicate one or more space domain vectors and one or more weighting coefficients. The network device may determine one or more airspace vectors and one or more weighting coefficients according to the first indication information. Similarly, the method for the network device to determine the airspace vector according to the first indication information corresponds to the method for the terminal device to generate the indication information for the airspace vector. The method by which the network device determines the weighting coefficient according to the first indication information corresponds to the method by which the terminal device generates the indication information of the weighting coefficient. Since the network device determines the space vector and the weighting coefficient according to the first indication information, reference may be made to the prior art. For brevity, the detailed description of the specific process is omitted here.
可选地,步骤240具体包括:网络设备在频域单元组中待上报的频域单元满足预设条件的情况下,根据该第一指示信息确定一个或多个频域向量。Optionally, step 240 specifically includes: the network device determining one or more frequency domain vectors according to the first indication information when the frequency domain unit to be reported in the frequency domain unit group meets a preset condition.
网络设备确定频域单元组中待上报的频域单元是否满足预设条件,与上文步骤210中终端设备确定频域单元组中待上报的频域单元是否满足预设条件的具体过程相似,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。The network device determines whether the frequency domain unit to be reported in the frequency domain unit group meets the preset condition is similar to the specific process of determining whether the frequency domain unit to be reported in the frequency domain unit group meets the preset condition in step 210 above, For brevity, I will not repeat them here.
该预设条件可以由终端设备和网络设备可以预先约定,或者,由协议预定义。网络设备和终端设备可以基于相同的预设条件确定待上报的频域单元是否满足预设条件。The preset condition may be pre-agreed by the terminal device and the network device, or pre-defined by the protocol. The network device and the terminal device may determine whether the frequency domain unit to be reported meets the preset condition based on the same preset condition.
可选地,该方法还包括步骤250,网络设备确定该频域单元组中一个或多个频域单元的预编码向量。Optionally, the method further includes step 250, the network device determines the precoding vectors of one or more frequency domain units in the frequency domain unit group.
网络设备可以根据预先确定的频域向量、空域向量和加权系数,例如由上文步骤240中确定,确定该频域单元组中一个或多个频域单元的预编码向量。The network device may determine the precoding vector of one or more frequency domain units in the frequency domain unit group according to the predetermined frequency domain vector, space domain vector and weighting coefficient, for example, as determined in step 240 above.
若终端设备针对R个传输层中的每个传输层分别反馈空域向量、频域向量和加权系数。则对于第r个传输层,网络设备可以根据第一指示信息确定L r个空域向量、M r个频域向量和L r×M r个加权系数。则网络设备可以基于如下公式确定第r个传输层上与该频域单元组中第j个频域单元的预编码向量: If the terminal device feeds back the space domain vector, the frequency domain vector, and the weighting coefficient for each of the R transmission layers, respectively. For the rth transmission layer, the network device may determine L r space domain vectors, M r frequency domain vectors, and L r ×M r weighting coefficients according to the first indication information. Then, the network device may determine the precoding vector on the rth transmission layer and the jth frequency domain unit in the frequency domain unit group based on the following formula:
极化方向数为1时,
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000013
When the number of polarization directions is 1,
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000013
极化方向数为2时,
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000014
When the number of polarization directions is 2,
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000014
其中,u l,r表示基于第r个传输层反馈的L r个空域向量中的第l个空域向量,v m,r表示基于第r个传输层反馈的M r个频域向量中的第m个频域向量,v m,r(j)表示v m,r中的第j个元素,
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000015
表示v m,r(j)的共轭;
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000016
表示归一化系数,
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000017
a l,m,r表示基于第r个传输层反馈的、与第l个空域向量u l,r和第m个频域向量v m,r对应的加权系数;a l,m,r,1表示基于第r个传输层反馈的、第一极化方向上与第l个空域向量u l和第m个频域向量v m对应的加权系数;a l,m,r,2表示基于第r个传输层反馈的、第二极化方向上与第l个空域向量u l,r和第m个频域向量v m,r对应的加权系数。
Wherein, u l, r represents based on L r a spatial vector r th transport layer feedback in the l th spatial vector, v m, r denotes based on the r th transport layer feedback M r frequency-domain vectors m frequency domain vectors, v m,r (j) represents the jth element in v m,r ,
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000015
Represents the conjugate of v m,r (j);
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000016
Represents the normalization coefficient,
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000017
a l,m,r represents the weighting coefficients corresponding to the lth space domain vector u l,r and the mth frequency domain vector v m,r based on the r th transmission layer feedback; a l,m,r,1 Represents the weighting coefficients corresponding to the lth space domain vector u l and the mth frequency domain vector v m in the first polarization direction based on feedback from the rth transmission layer; a l, m, r, 2 means based on the rth The weighting coefficients corresponding to the l-th space domain vector u l,r and the m-th frequency domain vector v m,r in the second polarization direction fed back by the transmission layer.
其中,每个加权系数可以包括幅度系数和相位系数。例如,
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000018
p l,m,r表示幅度系数,
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000019
表示相位系数。a l,m,r,1和a l,m,r,2分别与幅度系数和相位系数的关系与之相似,为了简洁,这里不再一一列举
Wherein, each weighting coefficient may include an amplitude coefficient and a phase coefficient. E.g,
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000018
p l,m,r represents the amplitude coefficient,
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000019
Represents the phase coefficient. The relationship between a l,m,r,1 and a l,m,r,2 and amplitude coefficient and phase coefficient respectively is similar. For brevity, I will not list them one by one here.
此外,如前所述,终端设备基于第r个传输层反馈的加权系数的个数可能并不一定是与L r×M r个,也就是说,并不一定与上述L r个空域向量和M r个频域向量构建的L r×M r个空频分量矩阵对应。而可能仅与该L r×M r个空频分量矩阵中的部分空频分量矩阵对应。在这种情况下,上述公式可以进一步简化,或者,将上式中部分未上报的加权系数当成幅度为零的加权系数来处理。由于网络设备恢复预编码向量的方法为设备的内部实现行为,本申请对于网络设备恢复预编码向量的具体方法不作限定。 In addition, as mentioned above, the number of weighting coefficients fed back by the terminal device based on the rth transmission layer may not necessarily be the sum of L r ×M r , that is, it may not necessarily be combined with the above L r space vectors The L r ×M r space frequency component matrices constructed by the M r frequency domain vectors correspond. However, it may only correspond to a part of the space-frequency component matrixes among the L r ×M r space-frequency component matrixes. In this case, the above formula can be further simplified, or the partial unreported weighting coefficient in the above formula can be treated as a weighting coefficient with zero amplitude. Since the method for the network device to restore the precoding vector is an internal implementation behavior of the device, the present application does not limit the specific method for the network device to restore the precoding vector.
若R个传输层共用一个或多个空域向量以及一个或多个频域向量,如L个空域向量和M个频域向量,则上述用于确定第r个传输层上与该频域单元组中第j个频域单元的预编码向量的公式可简化为:If R transmission layers share one or more space domain vectors and one or more frequency domain vectors, such as L space domain vectors and M frequency domain vectors, the above is used to determine the rth transmission layer and the frequency domain unit group The formula of the precoding vector of the jth frequency domain unit in can be simplified to:
极化方向数为1时,
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000020
When the number of polarization directions is 1,
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000020
极化方向数为2时,
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000021
When the number of polarization directions is 2,
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000021
其中,u l表示L个空域向量中的第l个空域向量,v m表示M个频域向量中的第m个频域向量。v m(j)表示v m中的第j个元素,
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000022
表示v m(j)的共轭。
Where u l represents the lth space domain vector among the L space domain vectors, and v m represents the mth frequency domain vector among the M frequency domain vectors. v m (j) represents the jth element in v m ,
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000022
Represents the conjugate of v m (j).
若终端设备基于每个空域向量分别反馈一个或多个频域向量,则上述用于确定第r个传输层上与该频域单元组中第j个频域单元的预编码向量的公式可变形为:If the terminal device feeds back one or more frequency domain vectors based on each space domain vector, the above formula for determining the precoding vectors on the rth transmission layer and the jth frequency domain unit in the frequency domain unit group can be deformed for:
极化方向数为1时,
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000023
When the number of polarization directions is 1,
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000023
极化方向数为2时,
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000024
When the number of polarization directions is 2,
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000024
其中,u l,r表示基于第r个传输层反馈的L r个空域向量中的第l个空域向量,
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000025
表示基于第r个传输层反馈的、与第l个空域向量对应的M l,r(M l,r≥1且为整数)个频域向量中的第m l个频域向量,
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000026
表示
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000027
中第j个元素的共轭;
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000028
表示基于第r个传输层反馈的、与第l个空域向量和第m l个频域向量对应的加权系数;
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000029
表示基于第r个传输层反馈的、第一极化方向上与第l个空域向量和第m l个频域向量对应的加权系数;
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000030
表示基于第r个传输层反馈的、第二极化方向上与第l个空域向量和第m l个频域向量对应的加权系数。
Where u l,r represents the lth space domain vector among the L r space domain vectors fed back based on the rth transport layer,
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000025
Represents the m l frequency domain vector among the M l, r (M l, r ≥ 1 and integer) frequency domain vectors corresponding to the l space domain vector based on the r th transmission layer feedback,
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000026
Express
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000027
The conjugate of the jth element in
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000028
Represents the weighting coefficients corresponding to the lth space domain vector and the ml frequency domain vector based on the rth transmission layer feedback;
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000029
R represents transmission based on the feedback layer, the first polarization direction and the l-th spatial vectors l and m frequency domain vectors corresponding weighting coefficient;
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000030
R represents transmission based on the feedback layer, the second polarization direction and the l-th spatial vectors l and m frequency domain vectors corresponding weighting coefficient.
若终端设备将空域向量的宽带幅度系数和空频分量矩阵的加权系数分开上报,则上述用于确定第r个传输层上与该频域单元组中第j个频域单元的预编码向量的公式还可变形为:If the terminal equipment separately reports the broadband amplitude coefficient of the space domain vector and the weighting coefficient of the space frequency component matrix, the above is used to determine the precoding vector on the rth transmission layer and the jth frequency domain unit in the frequency domain unit group The formula can also be transformed into:
极化方向数为1时,
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000031
When the number of polarization directions is 1,
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000031
极化方向数为2时,
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000032
When the number of polarization directions is 2,
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000032
其中,
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000033
表示基于第r个传输层反馈的、与第l个空域向量对应的宽带幅度系数;p l,m,r表示基于第r个传输层反馈的、与第l个空域向量和第m个频域向量对应的;
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000034
表示基于第r个传输层反馈的、与第l个空域向量和第m个频域向量对应的相位系数;
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000035
表示基于第r个传输层反馈的、第一极化方向上与第l个空域向量对应的的宽带幅度系数;p l,m,r,1表示基于第r个传输层反馈的、第一极化方向上与第l个空域向量和第m个频域向量对应的幅度系数;
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000036
表示基于第r个传输层反馈的、第一极化方向上与第l个空域向量和第m个频域向量对应的相位系数;
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000037
表示基于第r个传输层反馈的、第二极化方向上的宽带幅度系数;p l,m,r,2表示基于第r个传输层反馈的、第二极化方向上与第l个空域向量和第m个频域向量对应的幅度系数;
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000038
表示基于第r个传输层反馈的、第二极化方向上与第l个空域向量和第m个频域向量对应的相位系数。
among them,
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000033
Represents the broadband amplitude coefficient corresponding to the lth space domain feedback based on the rth transmission layer; p l,m,r represents the lth space domain vector and mth frequency domain based on the rth transmission layer feedback Vector corresponding
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000034
Represents the phase coefficient corresponding to the lth space domain vector and the mth frequency domain vector based on the rth transmission layer feedback;
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000035
Represents the broadband amplitude coefficient corresponding to the lth space domain vector in the first polarization direction based on the rth transmission layer feedback; p l,m,r,1 represents the first pole based on the rth transmission layer feedback Amplitude coefficients corresponding to the lth space domain vector and the mth frequency domain vector in the normalization direction;
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000036
Represents the phase coefficients corresponding to the lth space domain vector and the mth frequency domain vector in the first polarization direction based on the rth transmission layer feedback;
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000037
Represents the broadband amplitude coefficient in the second polarization direction based on the r-th transmission layer feedback; p l,m,r,2 represents the second polarization direction and the l-th space domain based on the r-th transmission layer feedback The amplitude coefficient corresponding to the vector and the m-th frequency domain vector;
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000038
Represents the phase coefficients corresponding to the lth space domain vector and the mth frequency domain vector in the second polarization direction based on the rth transmission layer feedback.
应理解,上文列举的用于恢复各频域单元的预编码向量的公式仅为示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。本领域的技术人员,基于相同的构思,可以对上述公式进行等价变换或替换,以恢复出各频域单元的预编码向量。It should be understood that the formulas listed above for recovering the precoding vectors of each frequency domain unit are only examples, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. Those skilled in the art, based on the same concept, can perform equivalent transformation or replacement on the above formula to recover the precoding vector of each frequency domain unit.
还应理解,上文列举的基于公式来计算各频域单元的预编码向量的方法仅为示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。网络设备也可以基于空域向量、频域向量和加权系数构建空频矩阵,如
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000039
进而确定各频域单元的预编码向量。另外,这里所示例的空频矩阵的计算式仅示出了R个传输层共用L个空域向量和M个频域向量的情况,上述各种可能的情况均可在此基础上变形得到。为了简洁,这里不再一一列举说明。
It should also be understood that the method for calculating the precoding vector of each frequency domain unit based on the formula listed above is only an example, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. The network device may also construct a space-frequency matrix based on the space-domain vector, frequency-domain vector, and weighting coefficients, such as
Figure PCTCN2020070495-appb-000039
Furthermore, the precoding vector of each frequency domain unit is determined. In addition, the calculation formula of the space frequency matrix shown here only shows the case where R transmission layers share L space domain vectors and M frequency domain vectors, and the above various possible situations can be modified on this basis. For the sake of brevity, I will not list them here.
本申请实施例中,终端设备基于频域单元组中从首个待上报的频域单元至末个待上报的频域单元所占带宽中包含的频域单元的数量确定频域向量的长度,可以使得所选择的频域向量能够保持频域的连续性,更能够准确地反映信道在频域的变化规律。因此能够保证较高的反馈精度,使得网络设备基于终端设备的反馈所恢复的预编码向量能够更好地与信道适配,进而有利于提高后续的数据传输性能。与之相对地,若仅仅根据待上报的频域单元的数量来确定频域向量的长度,所选择的频域向量并未真正地模拟连续的多个频域单元上信道的变化规律,因此并不能够准确反映信道在频域的变化规律,反馈精度受到影响。In the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device determines the length of the frequency domain vector based on the number of frequency domain units included in the bandwidth occupied by the frequency domain unit from the first frequency domain unit to the last frequency domain unit in the frequency domain unit group, The selected frequency domain vector can maintain the continuity of the frequency domain, and can more accurately reflect the changing law of the channel in the frequency domain. Therefore, a higher feedback accuracy can be ensured, so that the precoding vector recovered by the network device based on the feedback of the terminal device can be better adapted to the channel, which is beneficial to improve the subsequent data transmission performance. On the contrary, if the length of the frequency domain vector is determined only according to the number of frequency domain units to be reported, the selected frequency domain vector does not really simulate the changing law of channels on consecutive frequency domain units, so It cannot accurately reflect the changing law of the channel in the frequency domain, and the feedback accuracy is affected.
并且,通过一个或多个频域向量来描述信道在频域上不同的变化规律,并通过该一个或多个频域向量的线性叠加来模拟信道在频域上的变化,充分挖掘了频域单元之间的关系,利用了频域的连续性,用较少的频域向量来描述信道在多个频域单元上的变化规律。相比于现有的type II码本反馈方式而言,无需基于每个子带独立上报子带叠加系数,在子带数增加的情况下,并不会造成反馈开销的成倍增加。因此可以大大减小反馈开销。In addition, one or more frequency domain vectors are used to describe the different changes of the channel in the frequency domain, and the linear superposition of the one or more frequency domain vectors is used to simulate the changes of the channel in the frequency domain, and the frequency domain is fully tapped. The relationship between the units utilizes the continuity of the frequency domain, and uses fewer frequency domain vectors to describe the changing law of the channel on multiple frequency domain units. Compared with the existing type II codebook feedback method, there is no need to independently report the subband superposition coefficients based on each subband, and when the number of subbands increases, the feedback overhead will not increase exponentially. Therefore, the feedback overhead can be greatly reduced.
应理解,上文所提供的用于构建预编码向量的向量指示方式中,对于频域向量的长度的确定方法并不限于一个传输层或者一个极化方向。终端设备对于一个频域单元组所确定的频域向量的长度可以适用于一个或多个传输层以及一个或多个极化方向。换句话说,对于一个频域单元组,终端设备可以仅确定一次频域向量的长度,进而进行双域压缩,以确 定待上报的频域向量。本申请对于传输层数、极化方向数均不做限定。It should be understood that in the vector indication manner provided for constructing the precoding vector provided above, the method for determining the length of the frequency domain vector is not limited to one transmission layer or one polarization direction. The length of the frequency domain vector determined by the terminal device for a group of frequency domain units may be applicable to one or more transmission layers and one or more polarization directions. In other words, for a frequency domain unit group, the terminal device can determine the length of the frequency domain vector only once, and then perform dual domain compression to determine the frequency domain vector to be reported. This application does not limit the number of transmission layers and the number of polarization directions.
如前所述,在待上报的频域单元的连续性并不是很好的情况下,或者,待上报的频域单元较少的情况下,通过双域压缩的方式来反馈预编码向量并不一定减小反馈开销,同时可能影响反馈精度。因此,上文提供的双域压缩的反馈方式可以与其他反馈方式并存,终端设备可以基于待上报的频域单元的数量和位置来确定采用哪种方式来向网络设备反馈预编码向量。As mentioned above, when the continuity of the frequency domain units to be reported is not very good, or the frequency domain units to be reported are few, the feedback of the precoding vector by dual domain compression is not The feedback overhead must be reduced, and feedback accuracy may be affected. Therefore, the feedback method for dual-domain compression provided above can coexist with other feedback methods, and the terminal device can determine which method to use to feed back the precoding vector to the network device based on the number and location of frequency domain units to be reported.
图6是从设备交互的角度示出的本申请另一实施例提供的上报PMI的方法600的示意性流程图。如图所示,该方法600可以包括步骤610至步骤630。下面详细说明方法600的各步骤。FIG. 6 is a schematic flowchart of a method 600 for reporting PMI provided by another embodiment of the present application from the perspective of device interaction. As shown, the method 600 may include steps 610 to 630. The steps of method 600 are described in detail below.
在步骤610中,终端设备生成PMI。In step 610, the terminal device generates PMI.
其中,上文方法200中已经对频域单元组做了详细说明,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。Among them, the frequency domain unit group has been described in detail in the method 200 above, and for the sake of brevity, no further description will be given here.
在本申请实施例中,在频域单元组中待上报的频域单元满足预设条件的情况下,该PMI包括一个或多个频域向量的指示。该一个或多个频域向量为频域向量组中的部分频域向量。如前所述,每个频域向量组中的各频域向量之间两两相互正交。也就是说,该一个或多个频域向量可以是通过频域压缩的方式从频域向量组中选择一个或多个频域向量。In the embodiment of the present application, in the case where the frequency domain unit to be reported in the frequency domain unit group satisfies the preset condition, the PMI includes an indication of one or more frequency domain vectors. The one or more frequency domain vectors are partial frequency domain vectors in the frequency domain vector group. As mentioned above, each frequency domain vector in each frequency domain vector group is orthogonal to each other. That is to say, the one or more frequency domain vectors may be one or more frequency domain vectors selected from the frequency domain vector group by frequency domain compression.
在频域单元组中待上报的频域单元不满足预设条件的情况下,该PMI不包括频域向量的指示,或者,仅包括频域向量组的指示。In the case where the frequency domain unit to be reported in the frequency domain unit group does not satisfy the preset condition, the PMI does not include the indication of the frequency domain vector, or only includes the indication of the frequency domain vector group.
具体地,在频域单元组中待上报的频域单元不满足预设条件时,终端设备可以仍沿用type II码本的PMI反馈方式,上报空域向量、宽带幅度系数和子带叠加系数,此情况下,PMI中不包括频域向量的指示。Specifically, when the frequency domain unit to be reported in the frequency domain unit group does not satisfy the preset condition, the terminal device may still use the PMI feedback method of the type II codebook to report the space domain vector, broadband amplitude coefficient, and subband superposition coefficient, in this case Next, the indication of the frequency domain vector is not included in the PMI.
在频域单元组中待上报的频域单元不满足预设条件时,终端设备也可以不采用type II码本的反馈方式,直接将一个频域向量组反馈给网络设备,以便网络设备根据该频域向量组中的各频域向量以及空域向量和加权系数恢复预编码向量。此情况下,该PMI中可以仅包括频域向量组的指示。或者,终端设备也可以不反馈频域向量组的指示,终端设备和网络设备可以预先约定将频域向量集合中的第一个频域向量组的频域向量用于恢复预编码向量。此情况下,PMI中不包括频域向量或频域向量组的指示。此时,虽然做了双域压缩,但并没有从频域向量组中选择部分频域向量,而是将频域向量组中的全部频域向量用来构建预编码向量。终端设备可以直接基于频域向量组中的全部频域向量,进一步基于双域压缩的方式确定空域向量和加权系数。例如,通过对空频矩阵进行空域和频域的DFT确定空域向量和加权系数等。When the frequency domain unit to be reported in the frequency domain unit group does not satisfy the preset condition, the terminal device may directly feed back a frequency domain vector group to the network device without using the type II codebook feedback method, so that the network device can Each frequency domain vector in the frequency domain vector group, as well as the space domain vector and weighting coefficients, restore the precoding vector. In this case, the PMI may include only the indication of the frequency domain vector group. Alternatively, the terminal device may not feed back the indication of the frequency domain vector group, and the terminal device and the network device may agree in advance to use the frequency domain vector of the first frequency domain vector group in the frequency domain vector set for recovering the precoding vector. In this case, the PMI does not include the indication of the frequency domain vector or frequency domain vector group. At this time, although dual-domain compression is performed, part of the frequency-domain vectors is not selected from the frequency-domain vector group, but all frequency-domain vectors in the frequency-domain vector group are used to construct a precoding vector. The terminal device may directly determine the space domain vector and the weighting coefficient based on all frequency domain vectors in the frequency domain vector group, and further based on the dual domain compression. For example, the spatial domain frequency and DFT of the spatial frequency matrix are used to determine the spatial domain vector and the weighting coefficient.
为便于区分和说明,本实施例中将将用频域向量组中的部分频域向量来构建预编码向量的双域压缩方式称为第一压缩方式;将用整个频域向量组来构建预编码向量的双域压缩方式称为第二压缩方式。将基于第一压缩方式反馈PMI的方式称为基于第一压缩方式的PMI反馈方式,将基于第二压缩方式反馈PMI的方式称为基于第二压缩方式的PMI反馈方式。可以理解,第一压缩方式和第二压缩方式都属于双域压缩方式。In order to facilitate differentiation and description, in this embodiment, the dual-domain compression method of constructing the precoding vectors using part of the frequency domain vectors in the frequency domain vector group is called the first compression method; the entire frequency domain vector group will be used to construct the pre-coding vector The dual-domain compression method of the encoding vector is called the second compression method. The method of feeding back the PMI based on the first compression method is referred to as the PMI feedback method based on the first compression method, and the method of feeding back the PMI based on the second compression method is referred to as the PMI feedback method based on the second compression method. It can be understood that both the first compression method and the second compression method belong to the dual-domain compression method.
需要说明的是,上文所述的PMI中包括频域向量的指示,并不表示PMI中仅包括频域向量的指示,例如,PMI中还可以包括空域向量的指示和加权系数的指示。这里所描述的PMI中是否包括频域向量的指示,只是为了区分第一压缩方式和第二压缩方式。It should be noted that the PMI described above includes the indication of the frequency domain vector, but does not mean that the PMI includes only the indication of the frequency domain vector. For example, the PMI may also include the indication of the space domain vector and the indication of the weighting coefficient. The indication of whether the frequency domain vector is included in the PMI described here is just to distinguish the first compression method from the second compression method.
在本申请实施例中,终端设备和网络设备可以预先约定预设条件。在频域单元组中待 上报的频域单元满足预设条件的情况下,采用基于第一压缩方式的PMI反馈;在频域单元组中的频域单元不满足预设条件的情况下,采用基于第二压缩方式的PMI反馈方式,或者,采用type II码本的PMI反馈方式。In the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device and the network device may pre-appoint preset conditions. When the frequency domain unit to be reported in the frequency domain unit group satisfies the preset condition, the PMI feedback based on the first compression method is adopted; when the frequency domain unit in the frequency domain unit group does not satisfy the preset condition, it is adopted The PMI feedback method based on the second compression method, or the PMI feedback method using type II codebook.
其中,在频域单元组中待上报的频域单元不满足预设条件的情况下,采用基于第二压缩方式的PMI反馈方式还是type II码本的PMI反馈方式可以由网络设备和终端设备预先约定,或者,协议预定义。网络设备和终端设备在确定频域单元组中待上报的频域单元不满足预设条件的情况下,可以基于相同的反馈方式执行相应的步骤。Where the frequency domain unit to be reported in the frequency domain unit group does not satisfy the preset condition, whether the PMI feedback mode based on the second compression mode or the PMI feedback mode of the type II codebook can be pre-determined by the network device and the terminal device The agreement, or, the agreement is predefined. When it is determined that the frequency domain unit to be reported in the frequency domain unit group does not satisfy the preset condition, the network device and the terminal device may perform corresponding steps based on the same feedback method.
下文中示例性地列举了几个可能的预设条件。应理解,当协议定义,或,网络设备和终端设备预先约定采用某一预设条件作为确定PMI反馈方式的依据时,网络设备和终端设备基于同一预设条件来确定PMI反馈方式。还应理解,下文所列举的预设条件仅为示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。The following exemplarily lists several possible preset conditions. It should be understood that when the protocol defines, or when the network device and the terminal device agree in advance to use a certain preset condition as the basis for determining the PMI feedback method, the network device and the terminal device determine the PMI feedback method based on the same preset condition. It should also be understood that the preset conditions listed below are only examples, and should not constitute any limitation to this application.
可选地,该预设条件为:频域单元组中待上报的频域单元的数量大于或等于x×Q,x为预定义值,0<x≤1。或者说,频域单元组中待上报的频域单元的数量与Q的比值大于或等于x。可选地,x=0.5。Optionally, the preset condition is: the number of frequency domain units to be reported in the frequency domain unit group is greater than or equal to x×Q, x is a predefined value, and 0<x≤1. In other words, the ratio of the number of frequency domain units to be reported in the frequency domain unit group to Q is greater than or equal to x. Optionally, x=0.5.
可选地,该预设条件为:频域单元组中待上报的频域单元的数量大于或等于预定义的第一阈值。Optionally, the preset condition is: the number of frequency domain units to be reported in the frequency domain unit group is greater than or equal to a predefined first threshold.
可选地,该预设条件为:频域单元组中待上报的频域单元的数量大于或等于预定义的第二阈值,且Q值大于或等于预定义的第三阈值。Optionally, the preset condition is that: the number of frequency domain units to be reported in the frequency domain unit group is greater than or equal to a predefined second threshold, and the Q value is greater than or equal to a predefined third threshold.
可选地,该预设条件为:频域单元组中待上报的频域单元数大于或等于预定义的第四阈值,且频域单元组中待上报的频域单元的数量大于或等于y×Q,0<y≤1,y为预定义值。Optionally, the preset condition is: the number of frequency domain units to be reported in the frequency domain unit group is greater than or equal to a predefined fourth threshold, and the number of frequency domain units to be reported in the frequency domain unit group is greater than or equal to y ×Q, 0<y≤1, y is a predefined value.
可选地,该预设条件为:频域单元组中不需上报的频域单元数小于或等于预定义的第五阈值,且Q值大于或等于预定义的第六阈值。Optionally, the preset condition is that the number of frequency domain units in the frequency domain unit group that does not need to be reported is less than or equal to a predefined fifth threshold, and the Q value is greater than or equal to a predefined sixth threshold.
可选地,该预设条件为:频域单元组中不需上报的频域单元数小于或等于预定义的第七阈值,且不需上报的频域单元数小于或等于z×Q,0<z≤1,z为预定义值。Optionally, the preset condition is: the number of frequency domain units that do not need to be reported in the frequency domain unit group is less than or equal to a predefined seventh threshold, and the number of frequency domain units that do not need to be reported are less than or equal to z×Q, 0 <z≤1, z is a predefined value.
可选地,该预设条件为:频域单元组中不需上报的频域单元数小于或等于预定义的第八阈值。Optionally, the preset condition is: the number of frequency domain units in the frequency domain unit group that does not need to be reported is less than or equal to a predefined eighth threshold.
由于上文方法200中已经对上述预设条件作了详细说明,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。Since the above-mentioned preset conditions have been described in detail in the above method 200, for the sake of brevity, they will not be repeated here.
当终端设备基于第一压缩方式确定频域向量,该频域向量的长度N f例如可以由上文所列举的频域单元组中从首个待上报的频域单元至末个待上报的频域单元所占带宽中包含的频域单元的数量Q确定。由于上文方法200中已经对N f和Q的关系做了详细说明,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。 When the terminal device determines the frequency domain vector based on the first compression method, the length N f of the frequency domain vector can be, for example, from the frequency domain unit group listed above from the first frequency domain unit to be reported to the last frequency to be reported The number Q of frequency domain units contained in the bandwidth occupied by the domain unit is determined. Since the relationship between N f and Q has been described in detail in the above method 200, for the sake of brevity, no further description will be given here.
但应理解,频域向量的长度N f并不限于由上述Q值确定,例如,频域向量的长度还可以由上报带宽中包含的频域单元的数量确定,或者,由频域单元组中待上报的频域单元的数量确定。本申请对此不作限定。 However, it should be understood that the length N f of the frequency domain vector is not limited to be determined by the above Q value, for example, the length of the frequency domain vector can also be determined by the number of frequency domain units included in the reported bandwidth, or, by the frequency domain unit group The number of frequency domain units to be reported is determined. This application does not limit this.
当终端设备基于第二压缩方式确定频域向量组,该频域向量的长度N f也可以与第一压缩方式下确定的频域向量的长度相同。例如,该频域向量的长度可以由频域单元组中从首个待上报的频域单元至末个待上报的频域单元所占带宽中包含的频域单元的数量Q确定。或者,该频域向量的长度也可以由频域单元组中待上报的频域单元的数量确定,或者, 该频域向量的长度还可以上报带宽中包含的频域单元的数量确定。本申请对此不做限定。 When the terminal device determines the frequency domain vector group based on the second compression mode, the length N f of the frequency domain vector may also be the same as the length of the frequency domain vector determined in the first compression mode. For example, the length of the frequency domain vector may be determined by the number Q of frequency domain units contained in the bandwidth occupied by the frequency domain unit from the first frequency domain unit to the last frequency domain unit in the frequency domain unit group. Alternatively, the length of the frequency domain vector may also be determined by the number of frequency domain units to be reported in the frequency domain unit group, or the length of the frequency domain vector may also be determined by the number of frequency domain units included in the reported bandwidth. This application does not limit this.
当协议定了频域向量的长度的确定方式之后,终端设备可以基于预定义的方法来确定频域向量的长度。网络设备也可以基于相同的方法以及终端设备的反馈确定用于恢复预编码向量的频域向量。After the protocol determines the length of the frequency domain vector, the terminal device can determine the length of the frequency domain vector based on a predefined method. The network device may also determine the frequency domain vector used to recover the precoding vector based on the same method and the feedback of the terminal device.
在步骤620中,终端设备发送PMI。相应地,网络设备接收PMI。In step 620, the terminal device sends PMI. Accordingly, the network device receives the PMI.
具体地,终端设备可以通过物理上行资源,如PUSCH或PUCCH,向网络设备发送PMI,以便于终端设备根据PMI确定预编码矩阵。Specifically, the terminal device may send the PMI to the network device through physical uplink resources, such as PUSCH or PUCCH, so that the terminal device determines the precoding matrix according to the PMI.
终端设备通过物理上行资源向网络设备发送PMI的具体方法可以与现有技术相同,为了简洁,这里省略对其具体过程的详细说明。The specific method for the terminal device to send the PMI to the network device through the physical uplink resource may be the same as that in the prior art. For brevity, a detailed description of the specific process is omitted here.
在步骤630中,网络设备根据PMI以及该频域单元组中待上报的频域单元是否满足该预设条件,确定各频域单元对应的预编码矩阵。In step 630, the network device determines the precoding matrix corresponding to each frequency domain unit according to the PMI and whether the frequency domain unit to be reported in the frequency domain unit group meets the preset condition.
网络设备可以基于上文所述的预设条件,判断终端设备是基于哪一种反馈方式来反馈PMI的,进而根据该反馈方式解析该PMI中的信息。The network device may determine which feedback method the terminal device uses to feed back the PMI based on the preset conditions described above, and then parse the information in the PMI according to the feedback method.
若网络设备确定频域单元组中待上报的频域单元满足预设条件,则可以确定终端设备基于第一压缩方式确定频域向量,即,采用了基于频域压缩的PMI反馈方式。网络设备可以基于上文方法200中步骤250中所列举的方法恢复各传输层上一个或多个频域单元的预编码向量,进而确定各频域单元的预编码矩阵。If the network device determines that the frequency domain unit to be reported in the frequency domain unit group meets the preset condition, it may be determined that the terminal device determines the frequency domain vector based on the first compression mode, that is, the PMI feedback mode based on frequency domain compression is used. The network device may restore the precoding vectors of one or more frequency domain units on each transmission layer based on the method listed in step 250 in the above method 200, and then determine the precoding matrix of each frequency domain unit.
若网络设备确定频域单元组中待上报的频域单元不满足预设条件,则可以确定终端设备采用了type II码本的PMI反馈方式,或,基于频域变换的PMI反馈方式。If the network device determines that the frequency domain unit to be reported in the frequency domain unit group does not satisfy the preset condition, it may be determined that the terminal device adopts a type II codebook PMI feedback method, or a frequency domain transform-based PMI feedback method.
若采用type II码本的PMI反馈方式,网络设备可以基于现有技术确定各频域单元的预编码矩阵。具体实现方式可参考NR协议TS38.214版本15(release 15,R15)中所定义的type II端口选择码本中所定义的反馈模式。为了简洁,这里不再赘述。If the PMI feedback method of type II codebook is used, the network device can determine the precoding matrix of each frequency domain unit based on the existing technology. For specific implementation, refer to the feedback mode defined in the type II port selection codebook defined in the NR protocol TS38.214 version 15 (release 15, R15). For brevity, I will not repeat them here.
若采用基于第二压缩方式的PMI反馈方式,网络设备可以根据预定义的频域向量组或终端设备反馈的频域向量组,基于双域压缩的方式确定各频域单元的预编码矩阵。其具体实现方式在上文方法200中步骤250已经做了详细说明,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。If the PMI feedback method based on the second compression method is used, the network device may determine the precoding matrix of each frequency domain unit based on the two-domain compression method according to the predefined frequency domain vector group or the frequency domain vector group fed back by the terminal device. The specific implementation manner has been described in detail in step 250 of the above method 200, and for the sake of brevity, no more details will be given here.
因此,本申请实施例引入多种反馈模式,根据待上报的频域单元的个数和位置选择合适的反馈模式来上报PMI。充分考虑了待上报的频域单元的数量,和分布的连续性。通过引入多种反馈模式来适用不同的情况,可以兼顾反馈精度和反馈开销,从而在两者间获得平衡。Therefore, embodiments of the present application introduce multiple feedback modes, and select an appropriate feedback mode to report PMI according to the number and position of frequency domain units to be reported. Fully considered the number of frequency domain units to be reported and the continuity of distribution. By introducing multiple feedback modes to adapt to different situations, you can take into account both feedback accuracy and feedback overhead, so as to achieve a balance between the two.
应理解,上述实施例中,各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后,各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定,而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。It should be understood that in the above embodiments, the size of the sequence number of each process does not mean the order of execution, and the execution order of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not constitute any limitation on the implementation process of the embodiments of the present application .
以上,结合图2至图6详细说明了本申请实施例提供的指示和确定预编码向量的方法。以下-,结合图7至图9详细说明本申请实施例提供的通信装置。In the above, the instructions provided by the embodiments of the present application and the method for determining the precoding vector are described in detail with reference to FIGS. 2 to 6. Hereinafter, the communication device provided by the embodiment of the present application will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 7 to 9.
图7是本申请实施例提供的通信装置的示意性框图。如图所示,该通信装置1000可以包括通信单元1100和处理单元1200。7 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown, the communication device 1000 may include a communication unit 1100 and a processing unit 1200.
在一种可能的设计中,该通信装置1000可对应于上文方法实施例中的终端设备,例如,可以为终端设备,或者配置于终端设备中的芯片。In a possible design, the communication device 1000 may correspond to the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment, for example, it may be a terminal device, or a chip configured in the terminal device.
具体地,该通信装置1000可对应于根据本申请实施例的方法200或方法600中的终端设备,该通信装置1000可以包括用于执行图2中的方法200或图6中的方法600中终 端设备执行的方法的单元。并且,该通信装置1000中的各单元和上述其他操作和/或功能分别为了实现图2中的方法200或图6中的方法600的相应流程。Specifically, the communication device 1000 may correspond to the terminal device in the method 200 or the method 600 according to an embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 1000 may include a terminal for performing the method 200 in FIG. 2 or the method 600 in FIG. 6 A unit of method performed by a device. In addition, each unit in the communication device 1000 and the other operations and/or functions described above are to implement the corresponding processes of the method 200 in FIG. 2 or the method 600 in FIG. 6, respectively.
其中,当该通信装置1000用于执行图2中的方法200时,通信单元1100可用于执行方法200中的步骤220和步骤230,处理单元1200可用于执行方法200中的步骤210。应理解,各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Wherein, when the communication device 1000 is used to perform the method 200 in FIG. 2, the communication unit 1100 can be used to perform steps 220 and 230 in the method 200, and the processing unit 1200 can be used to perform step 210 in the method 200. It should be understood that the specific process for each unit to execute the above corresponding steps has been described in detail in the above method embodiments, and for the sake of brevity, no further description is provided here.
当该通信装置1000用于执行图6中的方法600时,通信单元1100可用于执行方法600中的步骤620,处理单元1200可用于执行方法600中的步骤610。应理解,各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。When the communication device 1000 is used to perform the method 600 in FIG. 6, the communication unit 1100 may be used to perform step 620 in the method 600 and the processing unit 1200 may be used to perform step 610 in the method 600. It should be understood that the specific process for each unit to execute the above corresponding steps has been described in detail in the above method embodiments, and for the sake of brevity, no further description is provided here.
还应理解,该通信装置1000为终端设备时,该通信装置1000中的通信单元1100可对应于图8中示出的终端设备2000中的收发器2020,该通信装置1000中的处理单元1200可对应于图8中示出的终端设备2000中的处理器2010。It should also be understood that when the communication device 1000 is a terminal device, the communication unit 1100 in the communication device 1000 may correspond to the transceiver 2020 in the terminal device 2000 shown in FIG. 8, and the processing unit 1200 in the communication device 1000 may It corresponds to the processor 2010 in the terminal device 2000 shown in FIG. 8.
还应理解,该通信装置1000为配置于终端设备中的芯片时,该通信装置1000中的通信单元1100可以为输入/输出接口。It should also be understood that when the communication device 1000 is a chip configured in a terminal device, the communication unit 1100 in the communication device 1000 may be an input/output interface.
在另一种可能的设计中,该通信装置1000可对应于上文方法实施例中的网络设备,例如,可以为网络设备,或者配置于网络设备中的芯片。In another possible design, the communication device 1000 may correspond to the network device in the foregoing method embodiment, for example, it may be a network device, or a chip configured in the network device.
具体地,该通信装置1000可对应于根据本申请实施例的方法200或方法600中的网络设备,该通信装置1000可以包括用于执行图2中的方法200或图6中的方法600中的网络设备执行的方法的单元。并且,该通信装置1000中的各单元和上述其他操作和/或功能分别为了实现图2中的方法200或图6中的方法600的相应流程。Specifically, the communication device 1000 may correspond to the network device in the method 200 or the method 600 according to an embodiment of the present application. The communication device 1000 may include the method 200 in FIG. 2 or the method 600 in FIG. 6. A unit of a method performed by a network device. In addition, each unit in the communication device 1000 and the other operations and/or functions described above are to implement the corresponding processes of the method 200 in FIG. 2 or the method 600 in FIG. 6, respectively.
其中,当该通信装置1000用于执行图7中的方法300时,通信单元1100可用于执行方法200中的步骤220和步骤230,处理单元1200可用于执行方法200中的步骤240和步骤250。应理解,各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Wherein, when the communication device 1000 is used to perform the method 300 in FIG. 7, the communication unit 1100 can be used to perform steps 220 and 230 in the method 200, and the processing unit 1200 can be used to perform steps 240 and 250 in the method 200. It should be understood that the specific process for each unit to execute the above corresponding steps has been described in detail in the above method embodiments, and for the sake of brevity, no further description is provided here.
当该通信装置1000用于执行图6中的方法600时,通信单元1100可用于执行方法600中的步骤620,处理单元1200可用于执行方法600中的步骤630。应理解,各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。When the communication device 1000 is used to perform the method 600 in FIG. 6, the communication unit 1100 may be used to perform step 620 in the method 600 and the processing unit 1200 may be used to perform step 630 in the method 600. It should be understood that the specific process for each unit to execute the above corresponding steps has been described in detail in the above method embodiments, and for the sake of brevity, no further description is provided here.
还应理解,该通信装置1000为网络设备时,该通信装置1000中的通信单元为可对应于图9中示出的网络设备3000中的收发器3200,该通信装置1000中的处理单元1200可对应于图9中示出的网络设备3000中的处理器3100。It should also be understood that when the communication device 1000 is a network device, the communication unit in the communication device 1000 may correspond to the transceiver 3200 in the network device 3000 shown in FIG. 9, and the processing unit 1200 in the communication device 1000 may It corresponds to the processor 3100 in the network device 3000 shown in FIG. 9.
还应理解,该通信装置1000为配置于网络设备中的芯片时,该通信装置1000中的通信单元1100可以为输入/输出接口。It should also be understood that when the communication device 1000 is a chip configured in a network device, the communication unit 1100 in the communication device 1000 may be an input/output interface.
图8是本申请实施例提供的终端设备2000的结构示意图。该终端设备2000可应用于如图1所示的系统中,执行上述方法实施例中终端设备的功能。如图所示,该终端设备2000包括处理器2010和收发器2020。可选地,该终端设备2000还包括存储器2030。其中,处理器2010、收发器2002和存储器2030之间可以通过内部连接通路互相通信,传递控制和/或数据信号,该存储器2030用于存储计算机程序,该处理器2010用于从该存储器2030中调用并运行该计算机程序,以控制该收发器2020收发信号。可选地,终端设备2000还可以包括天线2040,用于将收发器2020输出的上行数据或上行控制信令通过 无线信号发送出去。FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device 2000 provided by an embodiment of the present application. The terminal device 2000 can be applied to the system shown in FIG. 1 to perform the functions of the terminal device in the above method embodiments. As shown, the terminal device 2000 includes a processor 2010 and a transceiver 2020. Optionally, the terminal device 2000 further includes a memory 2030. Among them, the processor 2010, the transceiver 2002 and the memory 2030 can communicate with each other through an internal connection channel to transfer control and/or data signals. The memory 2030 is used to store a computer program, and the processor 2010 is used from the memory 2030 Call and run the computer program to control the transceiver 2020 to send and receive signals. Optionally, the terminal device 2000 may further include an antenna 2040 for sending uplink data or uplink control signaling output by the transceiver 2020 through a wireless signal.
上述处理器2010可以和存储器2030可以合成一个处理装置,处理器2010用于执行存储器2030中存储的程序代码来实现上述功能。具体实现时,该存储器2030也可以集成在处理器2010中,或者独立于处理器2010。该处理器2010可以与图7中的处理单元对应。The processor 2010 and the memory 2030 may be combined into a processing device. The processor 2010 is used to execute the program code stored in the memory 2030 to implement the above functions. In specific implementation, the memory 2030 may also be integrated in the processor 2010 or independent of the processor 2010. The processor 2010 may correspond to the processing unit in FIG. 7.
上述收发器2020可以与图7中的通信单元对应,也可以称为收发单元。收发器2020可以包括接收器(或称接收机、接收电路)和发射器(或称发射机、发射电路)。其中,接收器用于接收信号,发射器用于发射信号。The above-mentioned transceiver 2020 may correspond to the communication unit in FIG. 7, and may also be referred to as a transceiver unit. The transceiver 2020 may include a receiver (or receiver, receiving circuit) and a transmitter (or transmitter, transmitting circuit). Among them, the receiver is used to receive signals, and the transmitter is used to transmit signals.
应理解,图8所示的终端设备2000能够实现图2或图6所示方法实施例中涉及终端设备的各个过程。终端设备2000中的各个模块的操作和/或功能,分别为了实现上述方法实施例中的相应流程。具体可参见上述方法实施例中的描述,为避免重复,此处适当省略详细描述。It should be understood that the terminal device 2000 shown in FIG. 8 can implement various processes involving the terminal device in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 2 or FIG. 6. The operations and/or functions of each module in the terminal device 2000 are respectively to implement the corresponding processes in the above method embodiments. For details, please refer to the description in the above method embodiments. In order to avoid repetition, the detailed description is appropriately omitted here.
上述处理器2010可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的由终端设备内部实现的动作,而收发器2020可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的终端设备向网络设备发送或从网络设备接收的动作。具体请见前面方法实施例中的描述,此处不再赘述。The above-mentioned processor 2010 may be used to perform the actions described in the foregoing method embodiments that are internally implemented by the terminal device, and the transceiver 2020 may be used to perform the operations described in the foregoing method embodiments by the terminal device to or from the network device. action. For details, please refer to the description in the foregoing method embodiment, and no more details are provided here.
可选地,上述终端设备2000还可以包括电源2050,用于给终端设备中的各种器件或电路提供电源。Optionally, the terminal device 2000 may further include a power supply 2050, which is used to provide power to various devices or circuits in the terminal device.
除此之外,为了使得终端设备的功能更加完善,该终端设备2000还可以包括输入单元2060、显示单元2070、音频电路2080、摄像头2090和传感器2100等中的一个或多个,所述音频电路还可以包括扬声器2082、麦克风2084等。In addition, in order to make the functions of the terminal device more perfect, the terminal device 2000 may further include one or more of an input unit 2060, a display unit 2070, an audio circuit 2080, a camera 2090, a sensor 2100, etc. The audio circuit It may also include a speaker 2082, a microphone 2084, and so on.
图9是本申请实施例提供的网络设备的结构示意图,例如可以为基站的结构示意图。该基站3000可应用于如图1所示的系统中,执行上述方法实施例中网络设备的功能。如图所示,该基站3000可以包括一个或多个射频单元,如远端射频单元(remote radio unit,RRU)3100和一个或多个基带单元(BBU)(也可称为分布式单元(DU))3200。所述RRU 3100可以称为收发单元,与图7中的通信单元1200对应。可选地,该收发单元3100还可以称为收发机、收发电路、或者收发器等等,其可以包括至少一个天线3101和射频单元3102。可选地,收发单元3100可以包括接收单元和发送单元,接收单元可以对应于接收器(或称接收机、接收电路),发送单元可以对应于发射器(或称发射机、发射电路)。所述RRU 3100部分主要用于射频信号的收发以及射频信号与基带信号的转换,例如用于向终端设备发送指示信息。所述BBU 3200部分主要用于进行基带处理,对基站进行控制等。所述RRU 3100与BBU 3200可以是物理上设置在一起,也可以物理上分离设置的,即分布式基站。9 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present application, for example, may be a schematic structural diagram of a base station. The base station 3000 can be applied to the system shown in FIG. 1 to perform the functions of the network device in the above method embodiments. As shown in the figure, the base station 3000 may include one or more radio frequency units, such as a remote radio unit (RRU) 3100 and one or more baseband units (BBU) (also called a distributed unit (DU) )) 3200. The RRU 3100 may be called a transceiver unit, corresponding to the communication unit 1200 in FIG. 7. Optionally, the transceiver unit 3100 may also be called a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, etc., which may include at least one antenna 3101 and a radio frequency unit 3102. Optionally, the transceiving unit 3100 may include a receiving unit and a transmitting unit, the receiving unit may correspond to a receiver (or receiver, receiving circuit), and the transmitting unit may correspond to a transmitter (or transmitter, transmitting circuit). The RRU 3100 part is mainly used for the transmission and reception of radio frequency signals and the conversion of radio frequency signals and baseband signals, for example, for sending instruction information to terminal devices. The 3200 part of the BBU is mainly used for baseband processing and controlling the base station. The RRU 3100 and the BBU 3200 may be physically arranged together, or may be physically separated, that is, distributed base stations.
所述BBU 3200为基站的控制中心,也可以称为处理单元,可以与图7中的处理单元1100对应,主要用于完成基带处理功能,如信道编码,复用,调制,扩频等等。例如所述BBU(处理单元)可以用于控制基站执行上述方法实施例中关于网络设备的操作流程,例如,生成上述指示信息等。The BBU 3200 is the control center of the base station, and may also be referred to as a processing unit, which may correspond to the processing unit 1100 in FIG. 7 and is mainly used to complete baseband processing functions, such as channel coding, multiplexing, modulation, spread spectrum, and so on. For example, the BBU (processing unit) may be used to control the base station to perform the operation flow on the network device in the above method embodiment, for example, to generate the above indication information.
在一个示例中,所述BBU 3200可以由一个或多个单板构成,多个单板可以共同支持单一接入制式的无线接入网(如LTE网),也可以分别支持不同接入制式的无线接入网(如LTE网,5G网或其他网)。所述BBU 3200还包括存储器3201和处理器3202。所 述存储器3201用以存储必要的指令和数据。所述处理器3202用于控制基站进行必要的动作,例如用于控制基站执行上述方法实施例中关于网络设备的操作流程。所述存储器3201和处理器3202可以服务于一个或多个单板。也就是说,可以每个单板上单独设置存储器和处理器。也可以是多个单板共用相同的存储器和处理器。此外每个单板上还可以设置有必要的电路。In an example, the BBU 3200 may be composed of one or more boards, and multiple boards may jointly support a wireless access network (such as an LTE network) of a single access standard, or may support different access standards respectively. Wireless access network (such as LTE network, 5G network or other networks). The BBU 3200 also includes a memory 3201 and a processor 3202. The memory 3201 is used to store necessary instructions and data. The processor 3202 is used to control the base station to perform necessary actions, for example, to control the base station to execute the operation flow of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment. The memory 3201 and the processor 3202 may serve one or more single boards. In other words, the memory and the processor can be set separately on each board. It is also possible that multiple boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, each board can also be provided with necessary circuits.
应理解,图9所示的基站3000能够实现图2或图6的方法实施例中涉及网络设备的各个过程。基站3000中的各个模块的操作和/或功能,分别为了实现上述方法实施例中的相应流程。具体可参见上述方法实施例中的描述,为避免重复,此处适当省略详细描述。It should be understood that the base station 3000 shown in FIG. 9 can implement various processes involving the network device in the method embodiment of FIG. 2 or FIG. 6. The operations and/or functions of each module in the base station 3000 are to implement the corresponding processes in the above method embodiments. For details, please refer to the description in the above method embodiments. In order to avoid repetition, the detailed description is appropriately omitted here.
上述BBU 3200可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的由网络设备内部实现的动作,而RRU 3100可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的网络设备向终端设备发送或从终端设备接收的动作。具体请见前面方法实施例中的描述,此处不再赘述。The above-mentioned BBU 3200 can be used to perform the actions described in the foregoing method embodiments that are implemented internally by the network device, and the RRU 3100 can be used to perform the actions described in the previous method embodiments that the network device sends to or receives from the terminal device. For details, please refer to the description in the foregoing method embodiment, and no more details are provided here.
本申请实施例还提供了一种处理装置,包括处理器和接口;所述处理器用于执行上述任一方法实施例中的用于构建预编码向量的向量指示方法。An embodiment of the present application further provides a processing device, including a processor and an interface; the processor is used to execute the vector indication method for constructing a precoding vector in any of the foregoing method embodiments.
应理解,上述处理装置可以是一个或多个芯片。例如,该处理装置可以是现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA),可以是专用集成芯片(application specific integrated circuit,ASIC),还可以是系统芯片(system on chip,SoC),还可以是中央处理器(central processor unit,CPU),还可以是网络处理器(network processor,NP),还可以是数字信号处理电路(digital signal processor,DSP),还可以是微控制器(micro controller unit,MCU),还可以是可编程控制器(programmable logic device,PLD)或其他集成芯片。It should be understood that the above processing device may be one or more chips. For example, the processing device may be a field programmable gate array (field programmable gate array (FPGA)), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or a system chip (SoC), or It is a central processor (CPU), it can also be a network processor (NP), it can also be a digital signal processing circuit (digital signal processor, DSP), or a microcontroller (micro controller) , MCU), can also be a programmable controller (programmable logic device, PLD) or other integrated chips.
在实现过程中,上述方法的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件处理器执行完成,或者用处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器,闪存、只读存储器,可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器,处理器读取存储器中的信息,结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。为避免重复,这里不再详细描述。In the implementation process, each step of the above method may be completed by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in the processor or instructions in the form of software. The steps of the method disclosed in conjunction with the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied and executed by a hardware processor, or may be executed and completed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor. The software module may be located in a mature storage medium in the art, such as a random access memory, a flash memory, a read-only memory, a programmable read-only memory, an electrically erasable programmable memory, and a register. The storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware. In order to avoid repetition, they are not described in detail here.
应注意,本申请实施例中的处理器可以是一种集成电路芯片,具有信号的处理能力。在实现过程中,上述方法实施例的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。上述的处理器可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器(DSP)、专用集成电路(ASIC)、现场可编程门阵列(FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件。可以实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件译码处理器执行完成,或者用译码处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器,闪存、只读存储器,可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器,处理器读取存储器中的信息,结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。It should be noted that the processor in the embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capabilities. In the implementation process, the steps of the foregoing method embodiments may be completed by instructions in the form of hardware integrated logic circuits or software in the processor. The aforementioned processor may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components . The methods, steps, and logical block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application may be implemented or executed. The general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may be any conventional processor or the like. The steps of the method disclosed in conjunction with the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied and executed by a hardware decoding processor, or may be executed and completed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor. The software module may be located in a mature storage medium in the art, such as a random access memory, a flash memory, a read-only memory, a programmable read-only memory, an electrically erasable programmable memory, and a register. The storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
可以理解,本申请实施例中的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器,或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中,非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only  memory,ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM,PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM,EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM,EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM),其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明,许多形式的RAM可用,例如静态随机存取存储器(static RAM,SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(dynamic RAM,DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM,DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM,ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM,SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM,DR RAM)。应注意,本文描述的系统和方法的存储器旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。It can be understood that the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be volatile memory or non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory. Among them, the non-volatile memory may be read-only memory (read-only memory, ROM), programmable read-only memory (programmable ROM, PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), electronically Erasable programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory. Volatile memory can be random access memory (random access memory, RAM), which acts as an external cache. By way of example but not limitation, many forms of RAM are available, such as static random access memory (static RAM, SRAM), dynamic random access memory (dynamic RAM, DRAM), synchronous dynamic random access memory (synchronous RAM, SDRAM), double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (double data SDRAM, DDR SDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM), synchronous connection dynamic random access memory (synchlink DRAM, SLDRAM) ) And direct memory bus random access memory (direct RAMbus RAM, DR RAM). It should be noted that the memories of the systems and methods described herein are intended to include, but are not limited to these and any other suitable types of memories.
根据本申请实施例提供的方法,本申请还提供一种计算机程序产品,该计算机程序产品包括:计算机程序代码,当该计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时,使得该计算机执行图2和图6所示实施例中任意一个实施例的方法。According to the method provided in the embodiment of the present application, the present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes: computer program code, when the computer program code runs on the computer, the computer is caused to perform the operations shown in FIGS. 2 and 6 The method of any one of the embodiments is shown.
根据本申请实施例提供的方法,本申请还提供一种计算机可读介质,该计算机可读介质存储有程序代码,当该程序代码在计算机上运行时,使得该计算机执行图2和图6所示实施例中任意一个实施例的方法。According to the method provided in the embodiments of the present application, the present application also provides a computer-readable medium, the computer-readable medium stores program code, and when the program code is run on the computer, the computer is caused to execute the operations shown in FIGS. 2 and 6. The method of any one of the embodiments is shown.
根据本申请实施例提供的方法,本申请还提供一种系统,其包括前述的一个或多个终端设备以及一个或多个网络设备。According to the method provided in the embodiments of the present application, the present application further provides a system, which includes the foregoing one or more terminal devices and one or more network devices.
在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(digital subscriber line,DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如,高密度数字视频光盘(digital video disc,DVD))、或者半导体介质(例如,固态硬盘(solid state disc,SSD))等。In the above embodiments, it can be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof. When implemented using software, it can be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, all or part of the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are generated. The computer may be a general-purpose computer, a dedicated computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices. The computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be from a website site, computer, server or data center Transmission to another website, computer, server or data center via wired (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.). The computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device including one or more available medium integrated servers, data centers, and the like. The usable medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a high-density digital video disc (DVD)), or a semiconductor medium (for example, a solid state disc, SSD)) etc.
上述各个装置实施例中网络设备与终端设备和方法实施例中的网络设备或终端设备完全对应,由相应的模块或单元执行相应的步骤,例如通信单元(收发器)执行方法实施例中接收或发送的步骤,除发送、接收外的其它步骤可以由处理单元(处理器)执行。具体单元的功能可以参考相应的方法实施例。其中,处理器可以为一个或多个。The network device in each of the above device embodiments corresponds exactly to the network device or terminal device in the terminal device and method embodiments, and the corresponding steps are performed by the corresponding modules or units, for example, the communication unit (transceiver) performs the receiving or The steps of sending, other than sending and receiving, can be executed by the processing unit (processor). The function of the specific unit can refer to the corresponding method embodiment. There may be one or more processors.
在本说明书中使用的术语“部件”、“模块”、“系统”等用于表示计算机相关的实体、硬件、固件、硬件和软件的组合、软件、或执行中的软件。例如,部件可以是但不限于,在处理器上运行的进程、处理器、对象、可执行文件、执行线程、程序和/或计算机。通过图示,在计算设备上运行的应用和计算设备都可以是部件。一个或多个部件可驻留在 进程和/或执行线程中,部件可位于一个计算机上和/或分布在2个或更多个计算机之间。此外,这些部件可从在上面存储有各种数据结构的各种计算机可读介质执行。部件可例如根据具有一个或多个数据分组(例如来自与本地系统、分布式系统和/或网络间的另一部件交互的二个部件的数据,例如通过信号与其它系统交互的互联网)的信号通过本地和/或远程进程来通信。The terms "component", "module", "system", etc. used in this specification are used to denote computer-related entities, hardware, firmware, a combination of hardware and software, software, or software in execution. For example, a component may be, but is not limited to, a process running on a processor, a processor, an object, an executable file, an execution thread, a program, and/or a computer. By way of illustration, both the application running on the computing device and the computing device can be components. One or more components can reside in a process and/or thread of execution, and a component can be localized on one computer and/or distributed between 2 or more computers. In addition, these components can execute from various computer readable media having various data structures stored thereon. The component may, for example, be based on a signal having one or more data packets (eg, data from two components that interact with another component between a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet that interacts with other systems through signals) Communicate through local and/or remote processes.
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各种说明性逻辑块(illustrative logical block)和步骤(step),能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。Those of ordinary skill in the art may realize that the various illustrative logical blocks and steps described in conjunction with the embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented by electronic hardware, or a combination of computer software and electronic hardware achieve. Whether these functions are executed in hardware or software depends on the specific application of the technical solution and design constraints. Professional technicians can use different methods to implement the described functions for each specific application, but such implementation should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。Those skilled in the art can clearly understand that for the convenience and conciseness of the description, the specific working processes of the above-described systems, devices, and units can refer to the corresponding processes in the foregoing method embodiments, and details are not described herein again.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统、装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed system, device, and method may be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are only schematic. For example, the division of the unit is only a logical function division, and there may be other divisions in actual implementation, for example, multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored, or not implemented. In addition, the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical, or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place or may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
在上述实施例中,各功能单元的功能可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令(程序)。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序指令(程序)时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质,(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如,DVD)、或者半导体介质(例如固态硬盘(solid state disk,SSD))等。In the above embodiments, the functions of each functional unit may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof. When implemented using software, it can be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions (programs). When the computer program instructions (programs) are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions according to the embodiments of the present application are generated in whole or in part. The computer may be a general-purpose computer, a dedicated computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices. The computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be from a website site, computer, server or data center Transmission to another website, computer, server or data center via wired (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.). The computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device including one or more available medium integrated servers, data centers, and the like. The usable medium may be a magnetic medium (eg, floppy disk, hard disk, magnetic tape), optical medium (eg, DVD), or semiconductor medium (eg, solid state disk (SSD)), or the like.
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机 软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。If the function is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of the present application essentially or part of the contribution to the existing technology or part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to enable a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to perform all or part of the steps of the methods described in the embodiments of the present application. The foregoing storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program codes .
以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。The above is only the specific implementation of this application, but the scope of protection of this application is not limited to this, any person skilled in the art can easily think of changes or replacements within the technical scope disclosed in this application. It should be covered by the scope of protection of this application. Therefore, the protection scope of the present application shall be subject to the protection scope of the claims.

Claims (40)

  1. 一种用于构建预编码向量的向量指示方法,其特征在于,包括:A vector indicating method for constructing a precoding vector is characterized by including:
    生成第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示一个或多个频域向量,所述一个或多个频域向量用于构建一频域单元组中的一个或多个频域单元对应的预编码向量,所述频域向量的长度N f由所述频域单元组中从首个待上报的频域单元至末个待上报频域单元所占的带宽中包含的频域单元的数量Q确定,其中,所述频域单元组包括一个或多个频域单元,且所述频域单元组所占的带宽为上报带宽的部分或全部带宽;N f和Q均为正整数; Generate first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate one or more frequency domain vectors, and the one or more frequency domain vectors are used to construct one or more frequency domain unit correspondences in a frequency domain unit group The precoding vector of the frequency domain, the length N f of the frequency domain vector is from the frequency domain unit in the bandwidth occupied by the frequency domain unit from the first frequency domain unit to be reported to the last frequency domain unit to be reported in the frequency domain unit group The quantity Q is determined, wherein the frequency domain unit group includes one or more frequency domain units, and the bandwidth occupied by the frequency domain unit group is part or all of the reported bandwidth; N f and Q are both positive integers;
    发送所述第一指示信息。Sending the first indication information.
  2. 如权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述生成第一指示信息,包括:The method of claim 1, wherein the generating the first indication information comprises:
    在所述频域单元组中待上报的频域单元满足预设条件的情况下,生成所述第一指示信息。When the frequency domain unit to be reported in the frequency domain unit group meets a preset condition, the first indication information is generated.
  3. 如权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述预设条件包括:所述频域单元组中待上报的频域单元的数量大于或等于x×Q,x为预定义值,0<x≤1。The method according to claim 2, wherein the preset condition comprises: the number of frequency domain units to be reported in the frequency domain unit group is greater than or equal to x×Q, x is a predefined value, 0< x≤1.
  4. 如权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,x为0.5。The method of claim 3, wherein x is 0.5.
  5. 如权利要求1至4中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,N f=Q。 The method according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein Nf = Q.
  6. 一种用于构建预编码向量的向量指示方法,其特征在于,包括:A vector indicating method for constructing a precoding vector is characterized by including:
    接收第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示一个或多个频域向量,所述一个或多个频域向量用于构建一频域单元组中的一个或多个频域单元对应的预编码向量,所述频域向量的长度由N f由所述频域单元组中从首个待上报的频域单元至末个待上报频域单元所占的带宽中包含的频域单元的数量Q确定,其中,所述频域单元组包括一个或多个频域单元,且所述频域单元组所占的带宽为上报带宽的部分或全部带宽;N f和Q均为正整数; Receiving first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate one or more frequency domain vectors, and the one or more frequency domain vectors are used to construct one or more frequency domain unit correspondences in a frequency domain unit group The precoding vector of the frequency domain, the length of the frequency domain vector from N f from the frequency domain unit in the frequency domain unit from the first frequency domain unit to be reported to the last frequency domain unit to be reported The quantity Q is determined, wherein the frequency domain unit group includes one or more frequency domain units, and the bandwidth occupied by the frequency domain unit group is part or all of the bandwidth of the reported bandwidth; N f and Q are both positive integers ;
    根据所述第一指示信息确定所述一个或多个频域向量。The one or more frequency domain vectors are determined according to the first indication information.
  7. 如权利要求6所述的方法,其特征在于,所述根据所述第一指示信息确定所述一个或多个频域向量,包括:The method according to claim 6, wherein the determining the one or more frequency domain vectors according to the first indication information comprises:
    在所述频域单元组中待上报的频域单元满足预设条件的情况下,根据所述第一指示信息确定所述一个或多个频域向量。When the frequency domain unit to be reported in the frequency domain unit group satisfies a preset condition, the one or more frequency domain vectors are determined according to the first indication information.
  8. 如权利要求7所述的方法,其特征在于,所述预设条件包括:所述频域单元组中待上报的频域单元的数量大于或等于x×Q,x为预定义值,0<x≤1。The method according to claim 7, wherein the preset condition comprises: the number of frequency domain units to be reported in the frequency domain unit group is greater than or equal to x×Q, x is a predefined value, 0< x≤1.
  9. 如权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,x为0.5。The method of claim 8, wherein x is 0.5.
  10. 如权利要求6至9中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,N f=Q。 The method according to any one of claims 6 to 9, wherein Nf = Q.
  11. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, characterized in that it includes:
    处理单元,用于生成第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示一个或多个频域向量,所述一个或多个频域向量用于构建一频域单元组中的一个或多个频域单元对应的预编码向量,所述频域向量的长度N f由所述频域单元组中从首个待上报的频域单元至末个待上报频域单元所占的带宽中包含的频域单元的数量Q确定,其中,所述频域单元组包括一个或多个频域单元,且所述频域单元组所占的带宽为上报带宽的部分或全部带宽;N f和Q均为正整数; The processing unit is configured to generate first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate one or more frequency domain vectors, and the one or more frequency domain vectors are used to construct one or more frequency domain unit groups The precoding vector corresponding to each frequency domain unit, the length N f of the frequency domain vector is included in the bandwidth occupied by the frequency domain unit from the first frequency domain unit to be reported to the last frequency domain unit to be reported in the frequency domain unit group The number of frequency domain units Q is determined, where the frequency domain unit group includes one or more frequency domain units, and the bandwidth occupied by the frequency domain unit group is part or all of the reported bandwidth; N f and Q Are positive integers;
    通信单元,用于发送所述第一指示信息。The communication unit is configured to send the first indication information.
  12. 如权利要求11所述的装置,其特征在于,所述处理单元具体用于,在所述频域单元组中待上报的频域单元满足预设条件的情况下,生成所述第一指示信息。The apparatus according to claim 11, wherein the processing unit is specifically configured to generate the first indication information when a frequency domain unit to be reported in the frequency domain unit group meets a preset condition .
  13. 如权利要求12所述的装置,其特征在于,所述预设条件包括:所述频域单元组中待上报的频域单元的数量大于或等于x×Q,x为预定义值,0<x≤1。The device according to claim 12, wherein the preset condition comprises: the number of frequency domain units to be reported in the frequency domain unit group is greater than or equal to x×Q, x is a predefined value, 0< x≤1.
  14. 如权利要求13所述的装置,其特征在于,x为0.5。The device of claim 13, wherein x is 0.5.
  15. 如权利要求11至14中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,N f=Q。 The device according to any one of claims 11 to 14, wherein N f =Q.
  16. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, characterized in that it includes:
    通信单元,用于接收第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示一个或多个频域向量,所述一个或多个频域向量用于构建一频域单元组中的一个或多个频域单元对应的预编码向量,所述频域向量的长度由N f由所述频域单元组中从首个待上报的频域单元至末个待上报频域单元所占的带宽中包含的频域单元的数量Q确定,其中,所述频域单元组包括一个或多个频域单元,且所述频域单元组所占的带宽为上报带宽的部分或全部带宽;N f和Q均为正整数; The communication unit is configured to receive first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate one or more frequency domain vectors, and the one or more frequency domain vectors are used to construct one or more frequency domain unit groups The precoding vector corresponding to each frequency domain unit, the length of the frequency domain vector ranges from N f from the frequency domain unit in the bandwidth occupied by the first frequency domain unit to be reported to the last frequency domain unit to be reported The number Q of included frequency domain units is determined, wherein the frequency domain unit group includes one or more frequency domain units, and the bandwidth occupied by the frequency domain unit group is part or all of the reported bandwidth; N f and Q is a positive integer;
    处理单元,用于根据所述第一指示信息确定所述一个或多个频域向量。The processing unit is configured to determine the one or more frequency domain vectors according to the first indication information.
  17. 如权利要求16所述的装置,其特征在于,所述处理单元具体用于,在所述频域单元组中待上报的频域单元满足预设条件的情况下,根据所述第一指示信息确定所述一个或多个频域向量。The apparatus according to claim 16, wherein the processing unit is specifically configured to, according to the first indication information, when a frequency domain unit to be reported in the frequency domain unit group meets a preset condition The one or more frequency domain vectors are determined.
  18. 如权利要求17所述的装置,其特征在于,所述预设条件包括:所述频域单元组中待上报的频域单元的数量大于或等于x×Q,x为预定义值,0<x≤1。The apparatus according to claim 17, wherein the preset condition comprises: the number of frequency domain units to be reported in the frequency domain unit group is greater than or equal to x×Q, x is a predefined value, 0< x≤1.
  19. 如权利要求18所述的装置,其特征在于,x为0.5。The device of claim 18, wherein x is 0.5.
  20. 如权利要求16至19中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,N f=Q。 The device according to any one of claims 16 to 19, characterized in that N f =Q.
  21. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, characterized in that it includes:
    处理器,用于生成第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示一个或多个频域向量,所述一个或多个频域向量用于构建一频域单元组中的一个或多个频域单元对应的预编码向量,所述频域向量的长度N f由所述频域单元组中从首个待上报的频域单元至末个待上报频域单元所占的带宽中包含的频域单元的数量Q确定,其中,所述频域单元组包括一个或多个频域单元,且所述频域单元组所占的带宽为上报带宽的部分或全部带宽;N f和Q均为正整数; A processor, configured to generate first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate one or more frequency domain vectors, and the one or more frequency domain vectors are used to construct one or more frequency domain unit groups The precoding vector corresponding to each frequency domain unit, the length N f of the frequency domain vector is included in the bandwidth occupied by the frequency domain unit from the first frequency domain unit to be reported to the last frequency domain unit to be reported in the frequency domain unit group The number of frequency domain units Q is determined, where the frequency domain unit group includes one or more frequency domain units, and the bandwidth occupied by the frequency domain unit group is part or all of the reported bandwidth; N f and Q Are positive integers;
    收发器,用于发送所述第一指示信息。The transceiver is used to send the first indication information.
  22. 如权利要求21所述的装置,其特征在于,所述处理器具体用于,在所述频域单元组中待上报的频域单元满足预设条件的情况下,生成所述第一指示信息。The apparatus according to claim 21, wherein the processor is specifically configured to generate the first indication information when a frequency domain unit to be reported in the frequency domain unit group meets a preset condition .
  23. 如权利要求22所述的装置,其特征在于,所述预设条件包括:所述频域单元组中待上报的频域单元的数量大于或等于x×Q,x为预定义值,0<x≤1。The apparatus of claim 22, wherein the preset condition comprises: the number of frequency domain units to be reported in the frequency domain unit group is greater than or equal to x×Q, x is a predefined value, 0< x≤1.
  24. 如权利要求23所述的装置,其特征在于,x为0.5。The device of claim 23, wherein x is 0.5.
  25. 如权利要求21至24中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,N f=Q。 The device according to any one of claims 21 to 24, wherein N f =Q.
  26. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, characterized in that it includes:
    收发器,用于接收第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示一个或多个频域向量,所述一个或多个频域向量用于构建一频域单元组中的一个或多个频域单元对应的预编码 向量,所述频域向量的长度由N f由所述频域单元组中从首个待上报的频域单元至末个待上报频域单元所占的带宽中包含的频域单元的数量Q确定,其中,所述频域单元组包括一个或多个频域单元,且所述频域单元组所占的带宽为上报带宽的部分或全部带宽;N f和Q均为正整数; The transceiver is used to receive first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate one or more frequency domain vectors, and the one or more frequency domain vectors are used to construct one or more frequency domain unit groups The precoding vector corresponding to each frequency domain unit, the length of the frequency domain vector ranges from N f from the frequency domain unit in the bandwidth occupied by the first frequency domain unit to be reported to the last frequency domain unit to be reported The number Q of included frequency domain units is determined, wherein the frequency domain unit group includes one or more frequency domain units, and the bandwidth occupied by the frequency domain unit group is part or all of the reported bandwidth; N f and Q is a positive integer;
    处理器,用于根据所述第一指示信息确定所述一个或多个频域向量。The processor is configured to determine the one or more frequency domain vectors according to the first indication information.
  27. 如权利要求26所述的装置,其特征在于,所述处理器具体用于,在所述频域单元组中待上报的频域单元满足预设条件的情况下,根据所述第一指示信息确定所述一个或多个频域向量。The apparatus according to claim 26, wherein the processor is specifically configured to, according to the first indication information, when a frequency domain unit to be reported in the frequency domain unit group meets a preset condition The one or more frequency domain vectors are determined.
  28. 如权利要求27所述的装置,其特征在于,所述预设条件包括:所述频域单元组中待上报的频域单元的数量大于或等于x×Q,x为预定义值,0<x≤1。The apparatus according to claim 27, wherein the preset condition includes: the number of frequency domain units to be reported in the frequency domain unit group is greater than or equal to x×Q, x is a predefined value, 0< x≤1.
  29. 如权利要求28所述的装置,其特征在于,x为0.5。The apparatus of claim 28, wherein x is 0.5.
  30. 如权利要求26至29中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,N f=Q。 The device according to any one of claims 26 to 29, wherein N f =Q.
  31. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,所述装置用于实现如权利要求1至5中任一项所述的方法。A communication device, characterized in that the device is used to implement the method according to any one of claims 1 to 5.
  32. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,所述装置用于实现如权利要求6至10中任一项所述的方法。A communication device, characterized in that the device is used to implement the method according to any one of claims 6 to 10.
  33. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括处理器,所述处理器用于执行存储器中存储的计算机程序,以使得所述装置实现如权利要求1至5中任一项所述的方法。A communication device, characterized in that it includes a processor for executing a computer program stored in a memory, so that the device implements the method according to any one of claims 1 to 5.
  34. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括处理器,所述处理器用于执行存储器中存储的计算机程序,以使得所述装置实现如权利要求6至10中任一项所述的方法。A communication device, characterized by comprising a processor for executing a computer program stored in a memory, so that the device implements the method according to any one of claims 6 to 10.
  35. 一种处理装置,其特征在于,包括:A processing device, characterized in that it includes:
    存储器,用于存储计算机程序;Memory, used to store computer programs;
    处理器,用于从所述存储器调用并运行所述计算机程序,以使得所述装置实现如权利要求1至5中任一项所述的方法。A processor, configured to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the device implements the method according to any one of claims 1 to 5.
  36. 一种处理装置,其特征在于,包括:A processing device, characterized in that it includes:
    存储器,用于存储计算机程序;Memory, used to store computer programs;
    处理器,用于从所述存储器调用并运行所述计算机程序,以使得所述装置实现如权利要求6至10中任一项所述的方法。A processor for calling and running the computer program from the memory to cause the device to implement the method according to any one of claims 6 to 10.
  37. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,包括计算机程序,当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1至5中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized by comprising a computer program, when the computer program runs on a computer, causing the computer to execute the method according to any one of claims 1 to 5.
  38. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,包括计算机程序,当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求6至10中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized by comprising a computer program, when the computer program runs on a computer, causing the computer to execute the method according to any one of claims 6 to 10.
  39. 一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品包括计算机程序,当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行如权利要求1至5中任一项所述的方法。A computer program product, the computer program product includes a computer program, and when the computer program runs on a computer, causes the computer to execute the method according to any one of claims 1 to 5.
  40. 一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品包括计算机程序,当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行如权利要求6至10中任一项所述的方法。A computer program product, the computer program product includes a computer program, and when the computer program runs on a computer, causes the computer to perform the method according to any one of claims 6 to 10.
PCT/CN2020/070495 2019-01-11 2020-01-06 Vector indication method for constructing precoding vector, and communication apparatus WO2020143580A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201910028291.8A CN111435850B (en) 2019-01-11 2019-01-11 Vector indication method and communication device for constructing precoding vector
CN201910028291.8 2019-01-11

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020143580A1 true WO2020143580A1 (en) 2020-07-16

Family

ID=71520659

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2020/070495 WO2020143580A1 (en) 2019-01-11 2020-01-06 Vector indication method for constructing precoding vector, and communication apparatus

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN111435850B (en)
WO (1) WO2020143580A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2023125699A1 (en) * 2021-12-31 2023-07-06 华为技术有限公司 Communication method and apparatus

Families Citing this family (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN116830469A (en) * 2020-12-29 2023-09-29 株式会社Ntt都科摩 Information sending method, precoding granularity determining method, terminal and base station
US20240030988A1 (en) * 2020-12-29 2024-01-25 Ntt Docomo, Inc. Terminal and base station

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN105450273A (en) * 2015-08-24 2016-03-30 电信科学技术研究院 Methods and apparatuses for transmitting coding indication information and determining precoding matrix
US20160226647A1 (en) * 2015-01-30 2016-08-04 Nokia Solutions And Networks Oy Reference precoding vectors for multiple rank indications for channel quality indication (cqi) reporting in a wireless
CN107682054A (en) * 2016-08-02 2018-02-09 电信科学技术研究院 A kind of channel state information feedback method and relevant device
CN108282197A (en) * 2017-01-05 2018-07-13 华为技术有限公司 The method and reception and transmitting end equipment of instruction and determining precoding vector
CN108390704A (en) * 2017-02-03 2018-08-10 上海诺基亚贝尔股份有限公司 Method and apparatus for MIMO communications
CN108988917A (en) * 2017-04-26 2018-12-11 华为技术有限公司 A kind of method and apparatus of instruction and determining precoding vector

Family Cites Families (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN106559182B (en) * 2015-09-25 2020-06-16 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Method, device and system for obtaining configuration of channel parameters
US9929812B2 (en) * 2015-12-07 2018-03-27 Qualcomm Incorporated Techniques for channel estimation using user equipment specific reference signals based on smoothed precoders in a frequency domain
CN107294642A (en) * 2016-03-31 2017-10-24 中兴通讯股份有限公司 A kind of method and device for realizing information feedback
CN108631836B (en) * 2017-03-24 2021-07-16 华为技术有限公司 Data transmission method and device
CN108632011B (en) * 2017-03-24 2023-11-21 华为技术有限公司 Method and device for data transmission
CN111064499B (en) * 2018-10-16 2023-11-10 华为技术有限公司 Method for indicating and determining precoding vector and communication device

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20160226647A1 (en) * 2015-01-30 2016-08-04 Nokia Solutions And Networks Oy Reference precoding vectors for multiple rank indications for channel quality indication (cqi) reporting in a wireless
CN105450273A (en) * 2015-08-24 2016-03-30 电信科学技术研究院 Methods and apparatuses for transmitting coding indication information and determining precoding matrix
CN107682054A (en) * 2016-08-02 2018-02-09 电信科学技术研究院 A kind of channel state information feedback method and relevant device
CN108282197A (en) * 2017-01-05 2018-07-13 华为技术有限公司 The method and reception and transmitting end equipment of instruction and determining precoding vector
CN108390704A (en) * 2017-02-03 2018-08-10 上海诺基亚贝尔股份有限公司 Method and apparatus for MIMO communications
CN108988917A (en) * 2017-04-26 2018-12-11 华为技术有限公司 A kind of method and apparatus of instruction and determining precoding vector

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2023125699A1 (en) * 2021-12-31 2023-07-06 华为技术有限公司 Communication method and apparatus

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN111435850B (en) 2022-06-14
CN111435850A (en) 2020-07-21

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2020125510A1 (en) Channel measurement method and communication device
WO2020125534A1 (en) Channel measurement method and communication apparatus
WO2020143577A1 (en) Parameter configuration method and communication apparatus
WO2020221118A1 (en) Method for indicating precoding matrix, method for determining precoding matrix, and communication device
WO2020125511A1 (en) Channel measurement method, and communications device
WO2020143580A1 (en) Vector indication method for constructing precoding vector, and communication apparatus
WO2020083057A1 (en) Method for indicating and determining pre-coding vector, and communication apparatus
CN111757382B (en) Method for indicating channel state information and communication device
US11362707B2 (en) Precoding vector indicating and determining method and communications apparatus
WO2020221117A1 (en) Coefficient indication method for constructing precoding matrix, and communication apparatus
WO2020244496A1 (en) Channel measurement method and communication apparatus
WO2020211681A1 (en) Channel measurement method and communication apparatus
US11863262B2 (en) Method for indicating vectors used to construct precoding vector and communications apparatus
WO2021159537A1 (en) Channel state information feedback method and communication apparatus
CN110875767B (en) Method and communication device for indicating and determining precoding vector
WO2020073788A1 (en) Precoding vector indication and determination method and communication device
WO2020078251A1 (en) Method for indicating pre-coding vector, method for determining pre-coding vector, and communication apparatus

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20738410

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20738410

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1